TIA Service Training 1 S
April 27, 2017 | Author: Miguel Reyes | Category: N/A
Short Description
Download TIA Service Training 1 S...
Description
SN3lA1315
•A•usnpu! Joj saamsuy
NIVHIIS
u!u!eii apvueS-V11 LS DIPANIS
s Tinsnpui pup suo uolletuomv Joj buluIpiLL
SIEMENS Information and Training Automation and Drives
SIMATIC S7 TIA-Service Training 1
1.
The SIMATIC S7 System Family
2.
Training Units and Addressing
3.
Installation/Maintenance of the Programmable Logic Controller
4.
The SIMATIC Manager
5.
Symbols
6.
Hardware Configuration
7.
Hardware Commissioning
8.
Block Architecture and Block Editor
9.
Binary Operations
ST-SERV1 Course AL: N
ECCN: 5D992
10. Digital Operations Export Regulations AL Number of European resp. German export list. Goods with labels not equal to "N" are subject to export authorization. ECCN Number of US export list. (Export Control Classification Number). Goods with labels not equal to "N" are subject to re-export authorization for export to certain countries. Indication Goods labeled with "AL not equal to N" (here: technical documentations) are subject to European or German export authorization when being exported out of the EU. Goods labeled with "ECCN not equal to N" (here: technical documentations) are subject to US re-export authorization. Even without a label, or with label "AL:N" or "ECCN:N", authorization may be required due to the final whereabouts and purpose for which the goods are to be used (here: technical documentations). Decisive are the export labels stated on order acknowledgements, delivery notes and invoices.
This document was produced for training purpose. SIEMENS assumes no responsibility for its contents.
11. Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP
12. Rewiring a User Program
13. Introduction to Micromaster
14. Documenting, Saving, Archiving
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable to damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
15. Closing Exercise
(--) SIEMENS AG 2009
16. Solutions Name: Course: from
to
17. Training and Support
Instructor:
18. Infoline
Tel: 01805 23 56 11 Fax: 01805 23 56 12 Internet: http://www.siemens.com/sitrain
19.
Version V5.9.1 (for STEP? V5.4 SP3. WinCC flexible 2008. Starter V4.0)
20.
1 SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.1
2.1 SITRAIN Training for qtr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page The SIMATIC S7 System Family ...... 2 Objectives 3 SIMATIC S7 Overview ................................................................................................................... 4 What does "Totally Integrated Automation" Mean ...... 5 The SIMATIC S7/C7 and WinAC Controllers ...... 6 S7-200 ........................................................................................................................................... 7 S7-200 Micro Controller 8 S7-200: Modules / Expansion Modules (EM) ...... 9 S7 - 300 Automation System .......................................................................................................... 10 S7-300: Modules ............................................................................................................................ 11 S7-300: CPU Design ...................................................................................................................... 12 S7-400 Automation System ............................................................................................................ 13 S7-400: Modules ............................................................................................................................ 14 S7-400: CPU Design ...................................................................................................................... 15 SIMATIC Embedded Automation - Overview .................................................................................. 16 Device Spectrum of SIMATIC Embedded Automation .................................................................... 17 An Application Example for PC-based Automation ........................................................................ 18 SIMATIC Microbox 427-B RTX "Embedded PC" ............................................................................ 19 SIMATIC S7- mEC (Modular Embedded Controller) ........................................................................ 20 PG/PC Requirements for Installing STEP 7 ..................................................................................... 21 Installing the STEP 7 Basic Package .............................................................................................. 22 STEP 7 Tools ................................................................................................................................. 23 STEP 7 Software Packages (Examples) ......................................................................................... 24 If You Want to Know More about the Topic "TIA" ............................................................................ 25 More Information ............................................................................................................................ 26 SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 1
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.2
V,
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industnal Solutions
Page Contents Programming Sequence Control Systems with S7- GRAPH ............................................................ 27 The State Diagram Method S7- HiGraph ......................................................................................... 28 Programming in the High Level Language S7- SCL ......................................................................... 29 CFC - Tool for Graphic Interconnection of Si Blocks ....................................................................... 30 Process Diagnosis with S7- PDIAG ................................................................................................. 31 Testing User Programs with S7- PLCSIM ........................................................................................ 32 Runtime Software for Closed-loop Control Engineering Tasks ......................................................... 33 Communicating with SIMATIC NET ................................................................................................. 34 Operator Control and Process Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI .......................................................... 35 Process Visualization and Operator Control with WinCC ................................................................. 36 Process Automation with SIMATIC PCS 7 ....................................................................................... 37 DRIVES Technology ....................................................................................................................... 38 The SINAMICS Family .................................................................................................................... 39
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 2
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
1
SIEMENS
Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... have an overview of the SIMATIC S7 system family be familiar with the S7-300 and S7-400 automation systems have an overview of the modules available for these automation systems understand the concept of "Totally Integrated Automation" (T.I.A.) be familiar with the programming devices be familiar with the PC requirements for working with STEP7 be familiar with the tools of the STEP7 basic programming package have an overview of the most important tools used in the T.I.A. concept
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.3
Page 3
li SITRAIN Training for
vi
Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
•
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Overview SIMATIC Software
SIMATIC PG SIMATIC PC
SIMATIC HMI k: kr: kt
tail.
,
111 YYYYYYYYiY
MPI Network Industrial Ethernet
SIMATIC NET
PROFIBUS
aI
SIMATIC Controller
A e
PROFIBUS DP
iy
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.4
AS-Interface
1
47.
O
0
O
0
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction
For the operation of machines, equipment and processes in almost all areas of manufacturing you require control elements in addition to energy supply. It must be possible to initiate, control, monitor and end the operation of any given machine or process.
Hard-wired Controllers -> PLC
In the hard-wired controllers of the past, the program logic was governed by the task-specific wiring of contactors and relays. Today, programmable logic controllers are used to solve automation tasks. The logic stored in the program memory of an automation system does not depend on equipment design and wiring and can be modified at any time with the help of a programming device.
Totally Integrated Automation
Production processes are no longer seen as individual partial processes, but rather as integral components of an entire production process. The total integration of the entire automation environment is today achieved with the help of: • one common software environment that integrates all components and tasks into one uniform easy to use system • a common data management (central database) •
a common communication between all participating automation components.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 4
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
What does "Totally Integrated Automation" Mean
WinCC
PCS7
/ /
w w D)
SIMATIC S7
LE]
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.5
11 SITRAIN Training for
1
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Totally Integrated Automation
The new SIMATIC family unifies all devices and systems, such as hardware and software, into a uniform, powerful system platform. In this platform existing barriers between computer, PLC, and process control have been overcome. Operator control and monitoring are improved.
Advantages
This totally integrated automation offers you, among other things, the following advantages: •
A scalable hardware platform. The optimal (price/performance) functionality (PLC or computer) can be chosen for the task to be solved.
•
An open totally integrated automation environment. An existing system can be easily extended, or future automation solutions can be integrated. Existing investments retain their value. The transition from an existing SIMATIC, TELEPERM or TI environment can be carried out very easily.
SITRAIN Training for
•
Powerful software increases the productivity in the implementation of a project reducing the engineering and life cycle costs. In addition, expenses for commissioning, maintenance and service are reduced.
•
SIMATIC is based on Windows standards and can thus easily use their applications (standard software) and communication mechanisms.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 5
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
The SIMATIC S7/C7 and WinAC Controllers modular
forrirru r rrr11
Upper and middle performance range
inir1.11 SIMATIC S7 - 400
Lower and middle performance range
complete
modular
—TV l•willF■PimIll
=LED
SIMATIC S7 - 300 Micro PLC
SIMATIC C7 — 6xx
corn act
SIMATIC S7 - 200
SIMATIC S7
Logo Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.6
G _
gler
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
SIMATIC S7
The programmable logic controller family consists of the Micro PLC (S7-200) performance range, the lower/middle performance range (S7-300) and the middle/upper performance range (S7-400).
SIMATIC 07
This complete system is the combination of a PLC (S7-300) and an operator panel of the HMI operator control and process monitoring system. The integration of programmable logic controller and operator panel in one device makes complete machine controls in the smallest space and at an economical price possible.
WinAC
WinAC is a PC-based solution. It is used when various automation tasks (control, visualization, data processing) are to be solved with a PC.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 6
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
S7-200 S7-22x
S7-21x
SIEMENS
!
SF RUN STOP
SIMATIC 0'7-200
10.0 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5
11.0 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5
Q0..01 .40
IQ Q 11 ,0
Q0.2 Q0.3 Q0.4 Q0.5
10.6
Q0.6
M.7
Q07
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Features
CPI . 214
SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_018.7
lir
Automation and Industrial Solutions
•
Modular small control system for the low-end performance range,
•
Performance-graded range of CPUs,
•
Extensive selection of modules,
•
Expandable design with up to 7 modules,
•
Backplane bus integrated in the modules,
•
Can be networked with - RS 485 communications interface or - PROFIBUS or - connected with Industrial Ethernet,
•
Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules,
•
No slot rules for peripheral modules,
•
Own software,
•
"Complete package" with power supply, CPU, I/O in one device,
•
"Micro PLC" with integrated functions.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 7
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
S7-200 Micro Controller
Status Indicators
Status Indicators for Integrated DO
lk
SIEMENS SINAlIC ST-200 SF RUN STOP
- Potentiometer - Memory Card - Mode Selector
PPI Connection
.1,
-I,
..5...6„.2
11
.0
4 irirliqjak
214-'RD22-0Y130
Status Indicators for Integrated DI
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
iv-
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.8
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Mode Selector
For manual mode selection of the CPU: STOP = Stop mode, the program is not executed. TERM = Program execution, read/write access possible from PG. RUN = Program execution, read-only access possible from PG.
Status Indicators (LEDs)
SF RUN STOP DP
Memory Card
Slot for memory card. A memory card saves the program contents in the event of a power outage without the need for a battery.
PPI Connection
The programming device / text display or another CPU is connected here.
= Group error; internal CPU fault; red = Run mode; green = Stop mode; yellow = PROFIBUS-DP (only CPU 215)
This enables you to access several controllers from a PG or text display. As well, the S7-200 CPUs use the Network Read (NETR) and Network Write (NETW) instructions to read and write to each other (peer-to-peer communication).
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 8
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
S7-200: Modules / Expansion Modules (EM)
i
#1drerla ,
i s i rd 'Afrawdrifir
0 artr010:4:00:ffir
40191111ftliffilpr
I / 0 Modules
Function Modules (FM)
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Expansion Modules (EM)
•
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.9
Communications Processors (CP)
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Digital input modules: 24VDC - 120/230VAC Digital output modules: - 24VDC - Relay Analog input modules: - Voltage - Current - Resistance - Thermocouple Analog output modules: - Voltage - Current
-
• •
•
Communications Processors (CP)
Using the CP 242-2, the S7-200 can be connected to an AS-Interface as the master. In that way, 31 AS-Interface slaves can control up to 248 binary elements. This greatly increases the number of inputs/outputs of the S7-200. Other communications modules are the modem and PROFIBUS-DP expansion modules. The SIMATIC NET CP 243-1 can be used to connect to Industrial Ethernet.
Accessories
Bus connector
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 9
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Features
SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.10
1 SITRAIN Training for
4F
Automation and Industrial Solutions
•
Modular small control system for the lower and middle performance range
•
Performance-graded range of CPUs
•
Extensive selection of modules
•
Expandable design with up to 32 modules
•
Backplane bus integrated in the modules
•
Can be networked with -
Multipoint Interface (MPI),
-
PROFIBUS or
-
Industrial Ethernet or
-
PROFINET
•
Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules
•
No slot rules for peripheral modules,
•
Configuration and parameter setting with the help of the "Hardware Configuration" tool
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 10
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
S7-300: Modules
Q PS
(optional)
V Q CPU
IM
Q Q Q
CP:
SM: SM: SM: SM: FM: (optional) DI DO Al AO - Counting
- Positioning - Closed-loop control
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
- Point-to Point - PROFIBUS - Industrial Ethernet
21 SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.11
gr.
Signal Modules
•
Digital input modules:
24VDC, 120/230VAC
(SM)
•
Digital output modules:
24VDC, Relay
•
Analog input modules:
Voltage, Current, Resistance, Thermocouple
•
Analog output modules:
Voltage, Current
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Interface Modules (IM)
The IM360/1M361 and 1M365 make multi-tier configurations possible. The interface modules loop the bus from one tier to the next.
Dummy Modules (DM)
The DM 370 dummy module reserves a slot for a signal module whose parameters have not yet been assigned. A dummy module can also be used to reserve a slot for installation of an interface module at a later date.
Function Modules (FM)
Perform "special functions": • Counting • Positioning • Closed-loop control.
Communications Processors (CP)
Provide the following networking facilities: • Point-to-Point connections • PROFIBUS • Industrial Ethernet •
Accessories
PROFINET.
Bus connectors and front connectors
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 11
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
S7-300: CPU Design CPU 315-2DP until Oct. 2002
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Mode Selector
Status Indicators (LEDs)
SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.12
Automation and Industrial Solutions
MRES
= Memory reset function (Module Reset)
STOP
= Stop mode, the program is not executed.
RUN RUN-P
= Program execution, read-only access possible from PG. = Program execution, read/write access possible from PG.
SF BATF
Group error; internal CPU fault or fault in module with diagnostics capability. = Battery fault; battery empty or non-existent.
DC5V
= Internal 5 VDC voltage indicator.
FRCE
= FORCE; indicates that at least one input or output is forced. = Flashes when the CPU is starting up, then a steady light in Run mode. = Shows a steady light in Stop mode. Flashes slowly for a memory reset request, Flashes quickly when a memory reset is being carried out, Flashes slowly when a memory reset is necessary because a memory card has been inserted.
RUN STOP
Memory Card
CPU 315-2DP after Oct. 2002
A slot is provided for a memory card. The memory card saves the program contents in the event of a power outage without the need for a battery. For CPUs after Oct. 2002, a Micro Memory Card is always necessary for operation. It also provides the backup in the event of a power outage.
Battery Compartment For CPUs up until Oct. 2002, there is a receptacle for a lithium battery under the cover. The battery provides backup power to save the contents of the RAM in the event of a power outage. For CPUs after Oct. 2002, no battery is necessary. MPI Connection
Connection for a programming device or other device with an MPI interface.
DP Interface
Interface for direct connection of distributed I/Os to the CPU.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 12
' ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Features
21 SITRAIN Training for
114
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.13
Automation and Industrial Solutions
•
The power PLC for the mid to upper performance range,
• •
Performance-graded range of CPUs Extensive selection of modules
• •
Expandable design to over 300 modules Backplane bus integrated in the modules Can be networked with - Multipoint interface (MPI),
•
- PROFIBUS or - Industrial Ethernet or - PROFINET •
Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules
•
No slot restrictions Configuration and parameter setting with the help of the "Hardware Configuration" tool Multicomputing (up to four CPUs can be used in the central rack).
• •
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 13
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Signal Modules (SM)
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
•
Digital input modules: 24VDC, 120/230VAC • Digital output modules: 24VDC, Relay • Analog input modules: Voltage, Current, Resistance, Thermocouple •
Interface Modules (IM)
A SITRAIN v„
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.14
Analog output modules: Voltage, Current.
The IM460, IM461, IM463, IM467 interface modules provide the connection between various racks: •
UR1 (Universal Rack) with up to 18 modules
• •
UR2 (Universal Rack) with up to 9 modules ER1 (Expansion Rack) with up to 18 modules
•
ER2 (Expansion Rack) with up to 9 modules.
Function Modules
Perform "special functions":
(FM)
• •
Positioning
•
Closed-loop control.
Counting
Communications
Provide the following networking facilities:
Processors (CP)
• •
Point-to-Point connections PROFIBUS
•
Industrial Ethernet
•
PROFINET.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 14
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
S7-400: CPU Design
Error LEDs Slot for Memory Card Mode Selector MPI/DP Interface DP Interface External Battery Supply
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.15
2 SITRAIN Training for tr
Il
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Fault LEDs
LEDs for the CPU's statuses and faults, both internal and external
Memory Cards
With the S7-400 CPUs you can, depending on your requirements, insert RAM or flash EPROM cards as external load memory: •
RAM cards are available with a capacity of: 64KByte, 256KByte, 1MByte, 2MByte. The CPU battery backs up the contents.
•
Mode Selector
Flash EPROM cards are available with a capacity of: 64KByte, 256KByte, 1MByte, 2MByte, 4MByte, 8MByte, 16MByte. The contents are backed-up on the integrated EEPROMs.
MRES = Memory reset function (Module RESet) STOP = STOP mode, that is, no program execution and output disabled ("OD" mode = Output Disabled). RUN
= Program execution, read-only access possible from PG.
RUN-P = Program execution, read/write access possible from PG. MPI / DP Interface
MPI / DP interface (parameter-assignable in HW-Config) for • •
establishing the online connection to the programming device connecting to distributed peripherals (DP)
•
data exchange with other stations (S7 Communication)
DP Interface
For connecting to distributed peripherals (DP, only for CPUs with 2 interfaces)
EXT-BATT
Additional external battery socket for a 5 VDC to 15 VDC source to back up the RAM when the power supply is being replaced.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 15
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
SIMATIC Embedded Automation - Overview Modular Controller
Open + Standard PC
• Highest ruggedness • Highest ruggedness 111• Modularity • Modularity • Scalable • Scalable • Commissioning through a Commissioning through "Automators" "Automators" ▪ H / F functionality • 10 year replacement parts availability • Long-term availability • Data-secure
IPC
S7-mEC RTX
SIMATIC S7
•
SIMATIC Soft-PLC and HMI options • Standard PC operating system and interfaces • Openness (HW + SW) • State-of-the-art PC technolog
▪ Rugged (embedded) • Commissioning requires PC know-how
• • • •
SIMATIC Soft-PLC and HMI options Standard PC operating system and interfaces Openness (HW + SW) Stat-of-the-art PC technology
The Best of Both Worlds
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
PC-based Control
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.16
rai'i r Automation T an d lnlfsotrial Solutions
SIMATIC Embedded Automation is the implementation of various automation tasks (PLC programming, visualization, data processing, HMI services) on one common PC and software platform. Today, three fundamental directions can be derived from this: •
Modular Controllers: field-proven S7-300 and S7-400 controllers with their different versions and performance characteristics
•
Embedded Controllers such as SIMATIC S7-mEC and SIMATIC Microbox 427B
•
SIMATIC Panel PCs with Win AC MP and Industrial PCs
For this purpose, Siemens offers the System PC based Automation as a block out of the area of "SIMATIC Totally Integrated Automation". Configuration, programming and parameter-assignment is handled by the familiar engineering tool STEP 7 as of Version V5.4 SP4. The WinCC flexible software package makes the HMI configuration possible. The existing WinAC RTX 2005 software is being replaced by the 2008 version. The most significant expansion is the PROFINET functionality with PN 10 and CBA (Component Based Automation). Included in this, among other things, is the high performance operation of PROFINET 10 as well as the open communication via "Open User Communication".
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 16
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
Device Spectrum of SIMATIC Embedded Automation
......... •
SIMATIC Microbox 427B- RTX SIMATIC Microbox 427B- HMI/RTX SIMATIC Panel PC 477B- HMI SIMATIC Panel PC 477B- HMI/RTX
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Device Spectrum
•
•
•
-
SIMATIC Panel MP 177/277/377 + WinAC MP SIMATIC S7-mEC SIMATIC WinAC 2008 RTX
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.17
•
SITRAIN Training for
▪
Automation and Industrial Solutions
The slide shows an overview of the most important device components that are available for SIMATIC Embedded Automation.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 17
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
An Application Example for PC-based Automation
WinCC flexible Thin Client
PG/PC
Data server
HMI
Windows Ethernet interface
System / Cell network 169.254...
111 11 3rd party device
laasamanss-sw j .= 111111tall sammurnequivirn ,
1111U1
OUC
WINAC RTX PROFINET interface
SI
f ••••■
192.168...
I
Main application case for PC-based Automation:
PLC
Field device Drive
HMI
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
PROFINET 10 local "behind" CPU to avoid dependancy on system configuration (independent assignment of IP addresses).
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.18
I
hr
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Application Example The application example above shows a possible structure for the use of a SIMATIC Microbox 427-B in an automation solution. The connection of local PN 10 slaves takes place behind the CPU to avoid dependencies on the system configuration. PROFINET 10 RT services can be used in parallel with CBA functions on the same line. Third party devices can be addressed via the open T communication (Open user communication) (T-send and T-receive). WinAC RTX 2008
SIMATIC WinAC RTX 2008 makes use of a PROFINET 10 Controller Interface for operating distributed PROFINET peripherals. Thereby, the RT and IRT operating modes are supported. Moreover, two different interface types can be operated with WinAC RTX 2008: •
the Standard Ethernet (LAN-Interface) of the SIMATIC PC
•
the CP1616/1604, integrated PROFINET interface of the S7-mEC and the SIMATIC PC
The interface integration in WinAC RTX 2008 and in the familiar STEP 7 configuration takes place similar to the PROFIBUS interfaces as submodules that are used today. They behave like the integrated PN interface of the SIMATIC S7CPUs. Basically, the following types of data transmission are available (Standard Ethernet LAN operating mode):
Realtime Core
SITRAIN Training for
•
PROFINET 10 RT with up to 128 PROFINET 10 devices
•
PROFINET Component Based Automation (CBA)
•
Open User Communication (T-communication)
•
S7 communication and routing
WinAC RTX 2008 simplifies the installation of the Ardence RTX realtime core. Effective immediately, this is completely integrated in the setup of WinAC RTX and no longer has to be installed separately.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 18
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
SIMATIC Microbox 427-B RTX "Embedded PC"
System Fault
RUN/STOP
Imo"=1712s1 Qatei
cPU
tijIfe
SIEMENS 1
PS
•
ON BATF
CPU
IT!
INTF EXTF BUSE-I • BUSF2 BUSF3 BUSF4 'Ili FR CE I RUN STOP O
IRUN Oi STOP
M RE S
4
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Microbox 427B...
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.19
_211 ' SITRAIN Training for It T and Industrial Solutions
The SIMATIC Microbox 427B-HMI/RTX is an "embedded solution" for combined controller and operator control and visualization tasks. The ready-to-go Microbox provides the WinAC RTX, WinCC flexible RT and Windows XPe software preinstalled. Special properties with regards to retentive storing of SIMATIC WinAC RTX user data exist. Configuration and programming is done as usual with STEP 7. Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS interfaces are available for download activities and data communication. Furthermore, USB interfaces, connection possibilities for flat screens (DVINGA), as well as a serial RS232 interface and up to three PC/104Plus cards are available. SIMATIC WinAC RTX makes the use of an "Open Development Kit" for implementing application-specific functions in the PLC program possible.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 19
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7- mEC (Modular Embedded Controller)
—0.11••■•••■■••.are. ,"
Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) for access to all S7-mEC programs
USB connection for mouse etc.
•
•
Thin Client
r
EM PCI-104
EM PC
2x USB 1x IE/PN 1x serial 1x DVI-I lx serial 1x CF slot SIMATIC S7
EC31 RTX
Connection of S7 standard peripherals Up to 3 PCI cards
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
STEP 7 for parameterization + diagnosis (RTX)
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.20
SITRAIN Training for =_ Automation and Industrial Solutions
Embedded Controller The new high-performance SIMATIC S7-mEC "modular embedded controller" completes the product portfolio in the area of the SIMATIC Controller. The benefits of a Standard S7 Controller are combined with those of a PC-based solution. Different automation solution tasks can be implemented on one hardware p:atform with the S7-mEC. The hardware basis consists of current PC technology with an Intel Core Duo 1.2 GHz processor, a 2GB Flash Disk and 1 GB main memory. SIMATIC WinAC RTX 2008 is used as the application program, Windows XPe functions as the operating system. Remote services, such as, remote monitoring via TCP/IP services are available. The S7-mEC also has a Multimedia Card Slot (MMC). The design without fan and hard drive is well-suited for the industrial environment. Three Industrial Ethernet ports and up to two additional USB interfaces enable the problem-free integration in existing automation scenarios. The S7-mEC "modular embedded controller" is installed and configured like an S7-300 PLC. SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.4 SP4 with additional hardware patch is used as the engineering tool (RTX version on the S7-mEC necessary). WinCC flexible can be used as an additional option for operator control and monitoring. The new SIMATIC Thin Client and other Windows XPe applications can also be used.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 20
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
1 SIEMENS
PG/PC Requirements for Installing STEP 7 Operating Systems:
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows Vista
Memory on the Hard Drive:
Depending on the installation, between 400 MB and 800 MB
Mouse:
Yes
Interfaces:
• CP5611 (PCI) or • CP5512 (PCMCIA) or • PC adapter (USB) • Industrial Ethernet Interface (NIC) • Programming interface for Memory Card (optional)
/ SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Requirements
18.09.2009 SERV1_010.21
A
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
SIMATIC Programming devices (PG) provide the optimum basis for using the STEP 7 software. You can, however, also use a PC that fulfills the above-listed requirements. So that you can make the necessary online connection between the automation system (PLC) and the PC, the PC must be equipped with one of the interfaces listed in the slide above. If user programs are to be loaded on memory cards outside of the CPU, the PC must also be equipped with the appropriate programming interface.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 21
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
Installing the STEP 7 Basic Package About
01
6,
Double-click on icon
• SIMATIC Manager
IcOUre
MM., L Wank[
51,7 Converting 55 Files
SIMATIC Manager [c) STEP 7 S7/M7/C7 verswi
V5.4 • SF%
Revisi n Level:
K5.4.4.0
PI LAD, STL, FBD - Programming 57 Blocks Memory Card Parameter Assignment
Communication
Activate through Start menu
tt Office Applications Utilities
•
Information
Business Appkations Programs Documents '
Setting the PG-PC Interface
ProSave
B
a STARTER
MI TI 405-S7 Converting TI Files
f STEP 7
TI 5135-57 Converting TI Files
WinCC flexible 2008 WinCC flexible Runtime 2008
Settings
111 Drive Monitor Search
•
S7-PLCSIM Simulating Modules
License Mona OPC-XML
State Graphs
on figuring ocess Diagnostics
Documentation
SIMATIC
rks signment
Help and Support
SIMATIC Manager ProTsol Pro CS
0 r Run... Log Off se3997... 3Shut Down...
4
d Start
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Installation
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.22
SITRAIN Training for %T
Automation and Industrial Solutions
1. Activate "Setup.exe" on the Installation CD or use the automatic Setup routine activation 2. Choose options 3. Choose language(s) 4. Insert authorization disk when prompted. 5. Re-boot when prompted
Software Protection
The STEP 7 software is copy-protected and can only be used on one programming device at a time. When you have installed the software, you cannot start using it until you have transferred the authorization to the hard disk drive from the authorization disk.
Notes
• Be sure to read the notes in the README.TXT file on the authorization disk. If you do not observe these instructions, you risk losing your authorization. • For emergency operation, the STEP 7 basic package can also be used without authorization. As well, there is also a 14 day limited authorization available in addition to the unlimited (in time) authorization.
Hot fixes
STEP7 software updates can be downloaded from the Internet.
Result
The main tool in STEP 7 is the SIMATIC Manager. There are two ways in which to activate it: 1. through the Task bar 4 Start - SIMATIC SIMATIC Manager or through 2. the icon "SIMATIC Manager" on the Windows Desktop.
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 22
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
STEP 7 Tools NCM 57 CFC - Interconnect blocks Configure SIMATIC Workspace
5+7 Converting 55 Files LAD, STL, FBD - Programming 57 Blocks Memory Card Parameter Assignment
Qp NetPro - Configuring Networks PID Control Parameter Assignment 57 SCL - Programming 57 Blocks 57-GRAPH - Programming Sequential Control Systems 57-PDIAG - Configuring Process Diagnostics 57-PLCSIM Simulating Modules Setting the PG-PC Interface TI 405-57 Converting TI Files
TI 505-57 Converting TI Files 57-HiGraph - Programming State Graphs STARTER
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.23
SITRAIN Training for 41
°'
Automation and Industrial Solutions
SIMATIC Manager
The SIMATIC Manager manages the STEP 7 projects. It is the main program and also appears on the WINDOWS desktop.
Notes
"STEP 7 - Readme" provides detailed information about the version, installation procedure, etc.
LAD, STL, FBD
Tool for writing STEP 7 user programs in the "Ladder Diagram", "Statement List" or "Function Block Diagram" programming languages.
Memory Card Parameter Assignment.
You can save your user programs on EPROM cards by either using the programming device or an external prommer. Different drivers are required, depending on the application.
Configuring Networks
Network configuration with the "NetPro" tool which belongs to the STEP 7 basic package.
Setting the PG-PC Interface
This tool is used for setting the local node address, the transmission speed and the highest node address in the MPI network.
PID Control Parameter Assignment
The basic STEP 7 software package also includes blocks for solving PID (closed-loop) control problems. You choose "PID Control Parameter Assignment" to start the program for assigning parameters to the closed-loop control blocks.
Converting S5 Files
STEP5 programs can be converted into the corresponding STEP 7 programs with the help of the S5/S7 converter.
Configure SIMATIC Workspace
This option provides facilities for configuring multi-user systems.
Converting TI Files
SIMATIC TI programs can be converted into the corresponding STEP 7 program with the help of the TI/S7 converter.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 23
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
STEP 7 Software Packages (Examples) Which PLC? SIMATIC S7-200
SIMATIC S7-300
Options
Necessary STEP 7 Micro/WIN
STEP 7 Lite
Tele Service
S7- PLCSIM
;11
SIMATIC S7-300
STEP 7
SIMATIC 57-400
S7- GRAPH
S7- SCL S7- HiGraph
Fuzzy Control
Standard PID Control
Modular PID Control
DOCPRO
TeleService
S7- PDIAG
S7- PLCSIM
PRODAVE MPI
S7- SCL
S7- PLCSIM
S7- GRAPH
11111 STEP 7 Professional
STEP 7
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
STEP 7
MP A SITRAIN Training for 111P. U. Automation and Industrial Solutions
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.24
STEP 7 is the basic package for configuring SIMATIC S7-300 or S7-400 systems. With STEP 7 you can: • configure hardware and assign parameters to it; • configure communication; • program; • test and debug; • document and archive; • carry out diagnosis.
STEP 7 Lite
STEP 7 Lite can be used to program the SIMATIC S7-300 (also the compact CPUs). Programs that were created with STEP 7 Lite can also be exported to STEP 7. It is not possible to carry out a PROFIBUS (DP) or ETHERNET configuration! ET200S or ET200X configuration (standalone) is possible. PLCSIM and Teleservice can be used as option packages.
STEP 7 Micro
STEP 7 Micro is suitable exclusively for configuring the S7-200.
License
With the exception of STEP Micro/Win, a license is required for each package.
STEP 7 Professional STEP 7 Professional is a Software Package that contains all IEC languages: STEP 7 Basic, S7-SCL, S7-GRAPH and the simulation package S7-PLCSIM. STEP 7 Professional is available as an upgrade package (Powerpack) for STEP7. Prerequisite for acquiring the powerpack is a valid STEP 7 license.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 24
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
If You Want to Know More about the Topic "TIA"
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Note
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.25
11 SITRAIN Training for ‘r
Automation and Industrial Solutions
The following pages contain either further information or are for reference to complete a topic. For more indepth study we offer advanced courses and self-learning mediums.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 25
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS SIEMENS
More Information
Download C Acrobat t to..-pler
/ "ILICI_Baugnypendatempdf] tone. 50.
f2abi learbeken Dgkment &wise
mikbaltscR5ck.iTo■
511.119115 57.300 ano to17 309 Programmable Controller.: Ma k* Somatc.mams
Lese.e.A
,_aff_j_Lj r
► ■I • • ; 17I ei 64 Gig j4
Siemens Katalog CA 01 10/2002 D
Ealaks learbeilen 2uc4reri Ausieehililen JiAres lesezeichen Internet 3
§ e
Set rArmS &stomata, & UV.:
.‘.....
.n g
-.
51F1.41FRIG
S
I (OAT
EF-0 2 Zerk4b4K4UpPen- Neu. Neu CPU 315: J bbereicht I 6nmndungsbereiCh AAP. I Eunkrrord 'ochry Oaten I Bosteildalen i ZikeNinBeuelicleien R-0 3 s Interaktivet Ketalog Siemens AID Er-04 Produkte A 11 Antriebstechnik D5 211 Automatisierungssysteme El- 0 6 S 0 Industie-Autometnerungssys Ei-0 ZenlFelbdugruppe 1 - Neu- N u CPU 315-2 DP s D Steuerungen 8 s O H/F-Technik FDA A O SIMATIC 505 Die CPU 315-2 DP verfugi E-Da O SIMATIC 05 • Mikroprozeseor. AD C SIMATIC 57 A DD der Prozessor erreicht eine Bearbeitungszeit von ca 100 ns je einaranweisung und 4 us le O 07-200 E13--0 E 57-300/S7-300F/5 • 128 KByte Arbedsspeicher (entspncht Owe 43 KAnweisungen): DF Li EMI-6111,N Der umfangreiche Arbeitsspeicher fOr ablaufrelevante Programmteile bietetAnwenderprog DG Zentralbaugrupi E Cards (may 8 MByte) als Ladespetcner fur Programm ermoglichen zusatiich die Projektat Kommentaren) in der CPU und kOnnen zur Datenarchivierung und Rezepturverwaltung yew E CPU 312C Di 1E CPU 313C • Flexible Ausbaubarkeit; E CPU 313C-2_ max. 32 Baugruppen (Izeiliger Aufbau) El CPU 313C-2 • Mehrpunkffehige Schnittstelle E CPU 3140-2 Die integrierle Schnittstelle MPI kann max_ 16 Verbindungen gleichzeitig zu 07-3001400 ode E CPU 314C-2 Von den Verbindungen ist jeweils eine kir PG und eine (Or OP fest reserwert. Mit der MPI ist • Neu . CPU 3 Datenkommunikation" eine einfache Vernetzung mit max. 16 CPUs aufzubauen • Neu CPU 3 • PROFIBUS DP-Schnittstelle • =ME Die CPU 315-2 DP mit PROFIBUS DP-MastertSlave-Schnittstelle ermeglicht einen dezentri p CPU 313 Geschwindigkeit und einfacher Handhabung. Die dezentrale Periphene wird aus Anwende CPU 314 (gieiche Projeldierung, Adressierung und Programmierung). E CPU 315 Es wird die PROFIBUS DP V1-Norm vollstandig unterstutzt. Dies ermbglichtverbesserte Di El CPU 315-21 V1-Normslaves. •I E CPU 316-21 • Passwortschutz, E CPU 318-21 Ein Passwortkonzept das Anwenderprogramm vor unberechtigtem Zugriff 2 CPU 312 1Ft • Diagnose-Puffer; DI CPU 3141Ff Die letzten 100 Fehler- und Unterbrechungsereignisse werden zu Diagnosezwecken in ein E CPU 314 CIL
E CPU 315E
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
• Wartungsfrete Datensicherung;
1 8.09.2009 SERV1_01E.26
SITRAIN Training for Ur
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Information
You will find more information on the SIMATIC systems in the items below.
Manual
The manuals give detailed information on the hardware and software. In addition to the paper version, you can also use the electronic manuals. They are, in part, included in the installation or STEP 7. You can download Internet.
the
most recent SIMATIC manuals free of charge from the
A collection of electronic SIMATIC manuals (HW, SW, Engineering, HMI, NET, PG) can be ordered under the order number 6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0. The ST 70 catalog
Catalog
contains all SIMATIC components with their performance and
order data.
Electronic Catalog
Siemens Partner
SITRAIN
In addition to the paper version, the (CA01) catalog is also available as a CD. This information is also available on the Internet (www.siemens.de/Simatic). Of course, your Siemens partner
Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
is also available for further information.
Page 26
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
Programming Sequence Control Systems with S7- GRAPH ❑ S7-GRAPH: The tool for programming sequence cascades o
Compatible with DIN EN 6.1131-3
S1
o
Designed for the requirements of production engineering o Graphic division of the process into steps and transitions o Steps contain actions o Transitions check the conditions for switching to the next step
— T1 S2
ij The following phases of automation can be optimized with S7-GRAPH: o o o o o
S4
— T3
Maintenance, Diagnostics
S7-GRAPH
— T5
T2
Programming Debugging Commissioning
0
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. AU rights reserved.
S6
S5
Planning, Configuring
SIMATIC S7
— T4
2/1 SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.27
ittr
Automation and Industrial Solutions
With the S7-GRAPH programming language, you can clearly and quickly configure and program sequential sequences that you wish to control with an S7 PLC system. The process is thus split into single steps with their own function scope. The sequence is graphically displayed and can be documented with picture and text. The actions to be performed and the transitions, which control the conditions for switching to the next step, are determined in the individual steps. Their definitions, interlocking or monitoring are determined by a subset of the STEP 7 programming language LAD (ladder diagram). S7-GRAPH for S7-300/400 is compatible with the sequence language established in the DIN EN 61131-3 standard.
Functionality
The following functions are offered: •
Test Functions
User Interface
SITRAIN Training for
Several sequencers in the same S7-GRAPH function block
•
Free number assignment of the steps and transitions
•
Simultaneous branches and alternative branches
•
Jumps (also to other sequence cascades)
•
Starting/Stopping of sequence cascades as well as activating/holding of steps.
• Display of active steps or faulty steps •
Status display and Modify Variable
•
Switching between the operating modes: manual, automatic and jogging mode
•
Overview, Single Page and Single-step display
•
Graphic separation of locking controls and monitoring conditions.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 27
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
The State Diagram Method S7- HiGraph Position Cam-operated Index out switch
❑ S7-HiGraph: The tool for programming using State Diagrams
111771=1
o Division of the machine into functional units o Creating state diagrams for every function unit
Motor
o States contain actions o State diagrams communicate using messages
Index in Index
Motor
❑ The following phases of automation can be optimized with S7-HiGraph:
Counterbearing lock/release Counterbearing
yt,
Coordinator
o Planning, Configuring o Programming and Debugging o Commissioning o Maintenance, Diagnostics o Supports reusability SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.28
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Overview
S7-Higraph allows the asynchronous processes to be described using state diagrams. The machine or system to be automated is looked upon as a combination of independent elements, the function units.
Function Units
The function units are the smallest mechanical units of a machine or system. As a rule, a function unit is made up of mechanical and electrical basic elements. In programming, a state diagram is assigned to every function unit. In it, the functional, that is, the mechanical and electrical properties of the function unit are mapped.
State Diagram
The state diagram describes the dynamic behavior of a function unit. It describes the states that a function unit can have, as well as the state transitions. State diagrams can be used more than once. State diagrams that were created once for a specific function unit, can be reused in other program locations.
Diagram Groups and Instances
By combining parallel running state diagrams, you can describe the complete functionality of a machine or system.
Advantages
This "object-oriented" method of S7-HiGraph is well suited for:
SITRAIN Training for
•
the machine and system manufacturer (mechanical engineering)
•
the automation specialist (electrical engineering) as common means of description
•
the commissioning engineer and the maintenance specialist
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 28
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
Programming in the High Level Language S7- SCL FUNCTION BLOCK Integrator VAR INPUT : BOOL; // Reset output value !nit // Input value x : REAL; Ta : TIME; // Sampling interval in ms : TIME; // Integration time in ms Ti // Output value upper limit olim : REAL; ulim : REAL; // Output value lower limit END_VAR
o S7-SCL: High level language for creating PLC programs o Compatible with DIN EN 6.1131-3 (ST=Structured Text)) o Certified according to "PLC open" Base Level o Contains all the typical elements of a high level language, such as operands, terms, control statements o PLC specifics are integrated, such as I/O access, timers, counters...)
VAR_OUTPUT y : REAL:. 0.0; END_VAR
BEGIN IF TIME_TO_DINT(Ti) = 0 THEN // Division by ? OK := FALSE; y := 0.0; RETURN; END_IF; IF Init THEN y:= 0.0; ELSE y := y+TIME_TO_DINT(Ta)*x/TIME_TO_DINT(Ti); IF y > olim THEN y := olim; END_IF; IF y < ulim THEN y := ulim; END_IF; END_IF; END_FUNCTION_BLOCK
Advantages: o Well structured, easy to understand program o For those knowledgeable in high level languages o For complex algorithms
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Overview
// Initialize output value with 0
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E29
ittr
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
S7-SCL (Structured Control Language) is a PASCAL-similar high level text language for S7 - 300/400 and C7 and simplifies the programming in control technology for mathematical algorithms, data management and organization tasks. S7-SCL has the PLC open Base Level certificate and is in accordance with the DIN EN 61131-3 (Structured Text) standard. With S7-SCL, you can formulate time-saving and economical solutions for automation tasks.
Functionality
SCL offers the functional scope of a high level language such as: •
loops
•
alternatives
•
branch distributors, etc.
combined with control-specific functions such as: •
bit accesses to the I/O, bit memories, timers, counters etc.
•
access to the symbol table
•
STEP7 block accesses
Advantages of SCL •
simple to learn programming language especially for beginners
•
easy to read (understandable) programs are generated.
•
simpler programming of complex algorithms and processing of complex data structures
•
integral debugger for symbolic debugging of the source code (single-step, breakpoints, etc.)
•
system integration in S7 languages such as STL and LAD.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 29
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
CFC - Tool for Graphic Interconnection of S7 Blocks ❑ CFC (Continuous Function Chart): Tool for graphic creation of PLC programs o Blocks are placed on function charts and interconnected o Interconnection is possible: - between I/O fields - also to blocks in other charts o Sources and destinations are managed in the margins
•
rato,f7
• .
CRMII
• •CIA! • • ,T7T-P • •SK.Z.L.
• • lb
Eta: CFC - [PC57Demo_extlSIMATIC 400-Slo gi Ben bate. gritipan &WPM jai
ACP1.14111 OF' I.■AS V,F
I
!nem fere fee*
---1.411412c1
Etta! 11
Oevat
011.1 CO C7•001111
1,1 RIC
SO /74 SC CU BB LI
— CO CIN
CIO CO RV SC
ria
SIMATIC S7
CC 017 SO
.11.001141 PO OM ON BO TIC.. CC OM,* CO CUM
o Program creation for technologists o quick creation, testing and commissioning times
CCM
0-1110 S Er•T•
S Lt. SO .1.0.11 I ST 171
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Fa.
CPO. CO
❑ Advantages
Overview
lo
•• •
•
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.30
014
indgufsot arra di nI n r
Automation T
rial Solutions
With the engineering tool CFC (Continuous Function Chart), you can create automation tasks by drawing a technology plan - similar to a Function Block Diagram in PLC programming. In this graphic programming method, blocks are positioned in a type of drawing sheet and are graphically interconnected with one another. You can quickly and easily convert technological aspects into complete executable automation programs with CFC.
Scope
Note
The following is supplied with CFC: •
CFC Editor
•
Code Generator
•
Debugger
•
Standard block libraries
The CFC product, as an option package, is smoothly integrated in the STEP 7 architecture with a unified Look & Feel and with common data management. CFC is easy to use, easy to learn and provides consistent data management. The CFC tool plays an important role in the configuration of the PCS 7 process control system. Prerequisite is a previously installed SCL option package.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 30
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
Process Diagnosis with S7- PDIAG ❑ Process diagnosis: Detection of faults occurring outside the PLC o Sensor/actuator defective, movement faulty,
❑ S7- PDIAG: Tool for configuring the fault definition in STL, LAD, FBD o Integrated in the development environment
• • S
■ •u• •■• ■ sea .***
• ass •"• ■
MAU a Ve
o Simple formulation of fault monitoring and message texts (during and after the program session) o Fault detection and criteria analysis are conducted automatically o Comprehensive information for the operator on: • type of fault • location of fault
Q1.0
I 1.0
• cause of fault
C)
❑ Reduction of down-time
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Process Diagnosis
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.31
%;.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Diagnosis is important in the operating phase of a plant or machine. Diagnosis is usually initiated when a fault leads to standstill or malfunction of the plant or machine. Programmable logic controllers are widely used in many areas. Field experience has proven that over 98% of faults occur in the peripherals (such as magnet valves and end switches). The distribution of fault occurrences makes it meaningful for the diagnosis to focus on process faults, since missing messages or faulty functions lead to down-times and the resulting costs. Process diagnosis diagnoses exactly these external components (such as sensors and actuators) or sequences in the process of a plant or machine.
S7-PDIAG
The S7-PDIAG software package enables a uniform configuration of the process diagnosis for the SIMATIC S7-300/400 controllers in the LAD, FBD and STL programming languages. You can already define signal monitoring routines including first-up signal acquisition and criteria analysis and input the associated message texts while or after creating the user program in the LAD, FBD or STL programming languages. PDIAG automatically generates monitoring blocks which you must call in your user program. At every call, the fault conditions are checked and in case of an error, the relevant process values are acquired and sent to the display device for the criteria analysis. For the configuration of the operator panel, S7-PDIAG stores the process diagnosis data in a shared database. This data can then be accessed by the OP configuration software WinCC flexible with the option package ProAgent and be made available for display on the operator panel.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 31
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
Testing User Programs with S7- PLCSIM ❑ S7-PLCSIM: Simulation software for offline testing of PLC programs
S7-PLCSIM - SimViewl MCI Ell Fie Edit View Insert ELC Elecute Tools Window Help
Aim
61
uCPU 300/400 ell SF sop P RUN-P DC r RUN RUN STOP r STOP MRES I
o Functional program test • on a simulated CPU • with display/modify
-
E
I/O
o Testing of user blocks in
Pres Fl to get Help.
• LAD, FBD, STL, S7-SCL,
-
in -in IIJ
11 [ EE IPIB Q 'Bits zi 76 54 3210 rrr r rrrr PI8 0
=2
• S7-GRAPH, S7-HiGraph, CFC • S7-PDIAG, WinCC 0
Advantages o Faults can be detected early and eliminated o Many tests are already possible in the office without the final hardware
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
S7 - PLCSIM
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.32
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
The SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM engineering tool (option package) emulates a complete S7-CPU including addresses and I/O on a PG/PC. S7-PLCSIM thus enables you to test a program offline on the PG/PC. All STEP 7 programming languages (STL, LAD, FBD, S7-Graph, S7-HiGraph, S7-SCL and CFC) can be used. S7-PLCSIM allows you to check the functionality of user programs on the PC/PG, regardless of whether the final hardware is available or not.
Functionality
S7-PLCSIM offers the following functions for running a program on a simulated PLC: •
An icon in the SIMATIC Manager 's toolbar switches the Simulation on or off. If the simulation is turned on, every new connection is automatically made to the simulated PLC. If the simulation is turned off, then every new connection is made to the " real" PLC.
Advantages
SITRAIN Training for
•
You can create view objects that allow you to access memory areas, accumulators and tabs of the simulated CPU. You can modify and display all the data in these view objects.
•
You can change the CPU 's operating mode (STOP, RUN and RUN-P) just as with a "real" CPU. The simulation also provides a "Pause" function that allows you to halt the program execution without affecting the state of the program.
With S7-PLCSIM, you can detect faults early in the development phase and eliminate them. The quality of the user programs is greatly improved and the commissioning costs are lowered.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 32
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
Runtime Software for Closed-loop Control Engineering Tasks
Configuration tool
Basic SW or option package
PID Controller
No
Basic SW
Basic SW PID Control
Yes
Basic SW
Standard PID Control
Yes
Option
Modular PID Control
Yes
Option
Fuzzy Control
Yes
Option
Neuro Systems
Yes
Option
Closed-loop control m.
Yes
Overview
S7-200
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
S7-300
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.33
C7
SITRAIN Training for 1
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Closed-loop In a closed-loop control system process variables are controlled in such a way Control Engineering that they reach their new preset values as quickly as possible and that they maintain these in spite of the effect of disturbances. Basic Software PID Control
The STEP 7 basic package already contains a series of function blocks for solving simple control engineering tasks.
Standard PID Control
This additional package contains blocks and a parameter assignment tool with integrated control setting for standard tasks such as temperature controllers, flow rate regulators, pressure regulators etc.
Modular PID Control
Through the interconnection of supplied standard function blocks, you can implement just about every closed-loop control engineering structure, even in the upper performance range of process engineering. The package contains 27 FBs and a commissioning tool.
Fuzzy Control
Fuzzy Systems are used when the mathematic description of a process is difficult or even impossible, when a process behavior is not consistent, when non-linearities occur, but, on the other hand, experience with the process exists.
NeuroSystems
Neuronal Systems are used with those problems, whose structure and solution are only partly known. NeuroSystems can be used in all automation levels, from the individual closed-loop controller to the optimization of a plant.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 33
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SIMATIC NET
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.34
111
4T
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
SIMATIC NET is the name of an entire family of networks. • Industrial Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3 - the international standard for the networking of areas and cells •
PROFIBUS according to EN 50170 - the international standard for the field area and the cell network with a limited number of nodes
•
AS-Interface - for communication with sensors and actuators.
Industrial Ethernet
The Industrial Ethernet network is a cell level network according to the international standard IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) and is designed for industrial use. Extensive open network solutions are possible. A high transmission rate is guaranteed with various transmission media. Industrial Ethernet is an industry standard, world-wide tested and accepted.
PROFINET
PROFINET as the standard for communication applications in the field level enables the interfacing of distributed field devices through Industrial Ethernet with the TCP/IP protocol.
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS is the bus system for cell networks with a limited number of nodes. It is based on the European standard EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. Since the requirements according to EN 50170 are fulfilled, PROFIBUS guarantees openness for the connection of components from other manufacturers that conform to standards. The PROFIBUS accessing procedure functions according to the "Token Passing with subordinate Master-Slave" procedure. As a result, a distinction is made between active and passive network participants.
AS - Interface
The AS-Interface is a networking system for binary sensors and actuators in the field area. With AS-Interface, binary actuators and sensors become capable of communication, for which a direct field bus connection was not technically possible up until now or was not economical.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 34
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
Operator Control and Process Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI Process visualization
Process visualization
system
system
SIMATIC WinCC
SIMATIC WinCC flexible
SIMATIC Panels, PGs, PCs
SIMATIC PG, PC
oft 10
4
E
-41E00101616W,
, ,....: l E.,. --- . F;':tql: ., 1 mat ing...aim s'
wiliom—idAZ -Er&
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Overview
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.35
41
1
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
For the SIMATIC S7, there is a field-proven HMI system for user-friendly process control and monitoring available, the SIMATIC HMI. It ranges from the simple text display to the process visualization system. SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI are completely harmonized and integrated. This simplifies the use of the human-machine interface system SIMATIC HMI considerably. •
SIMATIC S7 has already integrated HMI services. The HMI system requests process data from the SIMATIC S7. Data transmission between SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI is carried out by the two operating systems and does not have to be taken into account in the user program. SIMATIC HMI systems can be connected directly to PPI (S7-200) and MPI or PROFIBUS (S7-300 and S7-400). Operation using PROFIBUS makes process control and monitoring even over greater distances possible.
•
Numerous features from the uniform database and symbols up to the same user-friendly Windows-oriented user interfaces simplify the use of HMI systems.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 35
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
Process Visualization and Operator Control with WinCC
/ Programming Interfaces
/ Alarm Logging (Message System)
Process visualization / Standard Interfaces
Tag Logging / (Archiving)
/ Report Designer (Report System) SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
/ PLC Communication SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.36
Automation and Industrial Solutions
WinCC
SIMATIC WinCC (Windows Control Center) is the open process visualization system from Siemens. It can be integrated problem free in a new or already existing PLC system.
Function Modules
The heart of SIMATIC WinCC is an industry and technology independent basic system with all the important functions for operator control and monitoring, such as:
Basis of WinCC
SITRAIN Training for
•
Pixel graphic display
•
Measured value acquisition (archiving functions, data compression, minimum and maximum values etc.)
•
Message display, archiving and reporting
•
Process communication to different PLC systems
•
Standard interlaces, for example, Microsoft programs
•
Documentation of machine and process sequences with individual reports.
WinCC is based on the 32-bit standard operating systems Windows 2000/XP from Mircrosoft. This platform gives WinCC the following functionality: •
Use of the Windows operating equipment (such as printer and driver)
•
Data exchange with other Windows applications via DDE, ODBC, SQL, OLE, ActiveX and OPC.
•
API programming interlace
•
use of hardware available in the market
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 36
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
1 SIEMENS
Process Automation with SIMATIC PCS 7 Engineering System
WA
Process terminal 1
Process terminal 2
WI
!Oi l
Process terminal 3
_Pli „„
1
Terminal bus
ICWinCC OS-Server
Pi W inCC OS -----r 7=:1 17_- ..._ _ -:* .
I
System bus S7-400as central unit
41 4
ET 200M ~r
41
G
Field devices
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.37
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction
SIMATIC PCS 7 represents the new control system generation in SIEMENS. It is the consistent, further development and summary of experiences with systems that are based on TELEPERM M, SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC S5. As a result, it is tailored to the process control system tasks in all industries.
Engineering System
The Engineering System can be designed as its own station in the system. It can however also be loaded as a software package in the OS components at the same time. The Engineering System has the following components: •
STEP 7 with the SIMATIC Manager, the central database, and with HW Config for configuring hardware and networks. It also contains the servers, that facilitate consistent configuration between PLC and OS.
•
SCL (Structured Control Language) as PASCAL-similar higher level programming language for block generation
•
CFC (Continuous Function Chart) for graphic configuration of the basic automation functions
•
SFC (Sequential Function Chart) for graphic configuration of production sequences
•
Expansion of the SIMATIC Manager with "Technological Hierarchy”
•
WinCC (Windows Control Center) for OS configuration
•
DOCPRO for documenting configuration data Import/Export wizard for bi-directional data exchange with other CAE systems
These components are supplemented by libraries that provide pre-defined blocks for PLC and OS.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 37
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
DRIVES Technology
Consistent drives spectrum for all applications ❑ From standard drives with 100 W up to large drives with 50 MW ❑ Motion and vector control ❑ Technology-specific closed-loop controllers
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Overview
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.38
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
You have the following drives spectrum: •
Low voltage motors are the first High Performance AC for machine and systems - the solution for the future: maintenance free, dynamic and powerful.
•
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES frequency converters. They control the speed of AC motors extremely exact. This series was designed for world-wide use. It is suitable for all supply voltages from 230 to 690 volt and is certified world-wide.
•
MICROMASTER and MICRO/MIDIMASTER Vector standard converters are frequency converters in the 120 watt to 75 kW performance range. Because of their compact form, they can be installed in the smallest space. The sensorless vector control allows it to be used in the medium performance range even for demanding applications. COMBIMASTER are compact units consisting of three-phase low voltage motors and frequency converters. MICROMASTER Integrated are frequency converters (IP 65) that are applied directly to three-phase low voltage motors of different manufacturers. MICRO/MIDIMASTER Eco are frequency converters specially designed for the requirements of the heating, ventilation and air conditioning industry.
•
SITRAIN Training for
SIMOREG converter equipment are fully digital compact units for threephase operation and are used for armature and field supply of variable speed DC drives. The range of rated direct current of the devices is from 15 to 2000 A and can be increased by parallel connection of SIMOREG devices. The most familiar applications include hoisting gear, ski lifts, elevators, cranes, and other reversing drives.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 38
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
The SINAMICS Family Frequency Converter for Standard Applications
SINAMICS G150
SINAMICS G120
SINAMICS G110
(single drive)
(single drive)
(single drive)
Frequency Converter for Motion-Contol Applications
SINAMICS S120
SINAMICS S120
SINAMICS S120
Cabinet Module
Chassis Block size (single drive)
Book size (modular)
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
V
18.09.2009 SERV1_01E.39
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Standard Applications
Drives with limited to medium demands on the control dynamics and functionality. Energy feedback into the network is not required as a rule (such as, pumps, fans, compressors, conveyor technology, door drives, mixers, kneaders, mills).
Motion Control Applications
Drives with high demands on the control dynamics and functionality. Energy feedback into the network is possible (for example, single drives such as elevators, extruders, conveyor technology, multimotor systems with modular design such as paper machines, rolling mill lines, plastic film machines, synthetic fiber systems, crane systems, packaging machines, printing machines, handling (robots), machine tools)
Benefits
The new drives family offers a handling as uniform as possible of planning, commissioning and parameter assignment. This is made possible through: • • • •
Other Versions
SITRAIN Training for
SIZER Configuration and Calculation Software STARTER Commissioning Software Uniform parameter structure Uniform hardware design
In addition to the display above of the most important family members, there is: - SINAMICS G120D for decentralized configuration outside of the cabinet - Frequency converters in the design of the SIMATIC ET200S and ET200pro - SINAMICS G130, the G150 without cabinet for the individual installation - SINAMICS S150, the feedback-capable version of the G150 - SINAMICS medium voltage drives (> 1000V) for large power ratings.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 39
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
2
Training Units and Addressing
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.1
ihr
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page
Contents
...... 2 Training Area Setup with S7 - 300 ...... 3 Configuration of the S7 - 300 Training Unit The Simulator ...... 4 The Conveyor Model ...................................................................................................................... 5 6 Complete Symbol List If You Want to Know More .............................................................................................................. 8 ...... 9 Training Area Setup with S7- 400 Configuration of the S7-400 Training Unit ....................................................................................... 10
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 1
ST-SERV1 Training Units and Addressing
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
S7 - 300 Training Area • • • • • • • •
SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV102E.2
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
The training area consists of the following components: An S7-300 programmable logic controller with the CPU 315-2 DP Digital input and output modules, analog module Simulator with digital and analog sections Conveyor model ET 200S distributed peripheral MM420 Micromaster with PROFIBUS module TP170B Touchpanel Programming device or PC
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 2
ST-SERV1 Training Units and Addressing
SIEMENS
2
Configuration of the S7 - 300 Training Unit
Module
-->
Slot No.
-->
PS
CPU
DI 32
DO 32
D18/D08
Al 2
2
4
5
6
7
0
4
8
304
I/O Address -->
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Configuration
Slot 5: Slot 6: Slot 7:
SITRAIN Training for
V
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
The programmable controller is configured with the following modules: Slot 1: Slot 2: Slot 4:
Addresses
18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.3
Power Supply 24V/5A CPU 315-2 DP Digital input 32x24V
Inputs from the simulator and thumbwheel buttons Digital output 32x24V/0.5A Outputs from the simulator and digital display Conveyor model Digital input and output module 8X24V/ 8x24V 0.5A Analog section from the simulator Analog input 2 Al
You can set the starting addresses of the modules by parameter assignment (freely).
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 3
ST-SERV1 Training Units and Addressing
SIEMENS
The Simulator Potentiometers for setting the analog values " PIW_All " (PIW 304)
BCD Digital Display QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)
"
.0 1 .2 .3
4 .5
.6 .7
.1 .3
.5
.6 .7
DI
DO
ND ND ND ND
• • • •
ND
•
.0 .1 .2 .3
4
No ND ‘ 0
* • 0
.5 .6 .7
)9
•
.0
' •
•
ND 19 ND \„, Ng \D
• • • •
2 .3 A
• 0
.6 .7
•
11111111
/ 1 — 1
. 7 1 I / / I I
s• s.
AIMMIIIMIEL
:7
-15V...*15V
All
AI2 0.01A02 -15V...+15V
Ill All = mi im ••
o o
0 8 1 5 mt
•
OV
All
0
Imi = NE
Al2
0
Al2
o o
A01
A02
LEDs Thumbwheel Buttons Switches / Momentary Contact Switches (QW 4) "IW_Thumbw" (IW 2) (IW 0)
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Design
Addressing
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.4
Two cables connect the simulator to the S7-300 or S7-400 training unit. The simulator is divided into the following three sections: •
Binary section with 16 switches / momentary contact switches and 16 LEDs
•
Digital section with 4 thumbwheel buttons and a digital display. The thumbwheel and digital (BCD) display use BCD values,
•
Analog section with two potentiometers for specifying or simulating analog input signals and a voltmeter that — selectable per switch — displays the voltage output set on the potentiometers or from the two output channels of the analog output module (as far as it exists).
You use the following addresses to address the inputs and outputs in your user program: Sensor / Actuator (D132, D032)
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Switch / Mom.Con
IW 0
LEDs
QW 4
Thumb. buttons
IW 2
Digital display
QW 6
Analog channels
PIW 304/306
Page 4
ST-SERV1 Training Units and Addressing
SIEMENS
2
The Conveyor Model Ell
"BAY1" "BAY2" "BAY3" "LB" (I 8.0) (I 8.7) (I 8.6) (I 8.5)
"K_Conv_RIGHT" (Q 8.5) "K_Conv_LEFT" (Q 8.6)
.Z. "Horn" ......... (Q 8.7)
I I 1t I 1 I "T Bay2" I "T_Bay3" I "T_Bay-LB" /' "T—Bay1" l (I 8.4) i (I 8.3) ; (I 8.2) : (I 8.1) "L_Bay-LB" "L_Bay3" "L_Bay2" "L_Bay1" (Q 8.4) (Q 8.3) (Q 8.2) (Q 8.1)
/
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Design
18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.5
SITRAIN Training for W.— Automation and Industrial Solutions
The slide above shows the conveyor model with its sensors and actuators as well as the assigned I/O addresses.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 5
ST-SERV1 Training Units and Addressing
Complete Symbol List 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46
47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Symbol C_Conv_Fault C_Parts DB_Instance_F620_Fault2 DB_Instance_F620_Fault3 DB_Parts FB_FaultEvaluation FC_Signal FC_Mode FC_ConvMotor FC_Fault FC_Count FC_Count Add FC_FaultEvaluation FC_MM420 T_System_ON T_System_OFF T_Jog_RIGHT T_Jog_LEFT S_M/A_ModeSelect T_M/A_Accept T_Ackn_Fault S_Fault1 S_Fault2 S_Fault3 LB T_Bay1 T_Bay2 T_Bay3 T_Bay-LB BAY1 BAY2 BAY3 IW_Thumbw IVV_State_MM420 IVV_Act_MM420 M_Flash_2Hz M_Flash_1Hz M_Aux_System_ON M_Aux_Man_ON M_Aux_Auto_ON M_Aux_C17 M_Aux_LB M_Jog_RIGHT M_Auto_RIGHT M_Conv_Fault M_Faultl M_Aux_Fault1 M_Fault2 M_Aux_Fault2 M_Aux_Auto M Aux_Count M System_ON_HMI M_System_OFF_HMI M_Conv Jog_RIGHT_HMI
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Address / C 17 C 18 DB 2 DB 3 DB 19 FB 20 FC 14 FC 15 FC 16 FC 17 FC 18 FC 19 FC 20 FC 42 I 0.0 I 0.1 I 0.2 I 0.3 I 0.4 I 0.5 I 1.0 I 1.1 I 1.2 I 1.3 I 8.0 I 8.1 I 8.2 I 8.3 I 8.4 I 8.5 I 8.6 I 8.7 WV 2 WV 42 NV 44 M 10.3 M 10.5 M 15.1 M 15.2 M 15.3 M 15.7 M 16.0 M 16.2 M 16.4 M 17.0 M 17.1 M 17.2 M 17.3 M 17.4 M 18.0 M 19.0 M 30.0 30.1 M 30.2 M
Data type COUNTER COUNTER FB 20 FB 20 DB 19 FB 20 FC 14 FC 15 FC 16 FC 17 FC 18 FC 19 FC 20 FC 42 BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL WORD WORD INT BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL
Comment Counter Conveyor faults Counter transported parts Instance DB for FB20, Evaluation of Fault 2 Instance DB for F620, Evaluation of Fault 3 DB with parts data FB for evaluating faults FC Indicator lights + Horn FC Set operating modes FC Control of conveyor motor FC Fault evaluation FC Count parts FC Count parts using addition FC for evaluating faults FC Control MM420 Momentary contact System ON Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact) Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MAN, I '=AUTO Momentary contact, confirm operating mode Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement Simulate Fault 1, 0=OFF/1 =ON Simulate Fault 2, 0=OFF/1 =ON Simulate Fault 3, 0=OFF/1 =ON Light barrier Momentary contact Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 2 Momentary contact Bay 3 Momentary contact Light barrier bay Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Proximity sensor Bay 3 BCD thumbwheel State word of MM420 Actual speed of MM420 Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON Edge auxiliary memory bit Counter-Conveyor faults Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT Memory bit Conveyor fault Memory bit for storing Fault 1 Edge auxiliary memory bit Fault 1 Memory bit for storing Fault 2 Edge auxiliary memory bit Fault 2 Auxiliary memory bit Edge AUTO on Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Memory bit System ON (HMI) Memory bit System OFF (HMI) Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI)
Page 6
ST-SERV1 Training Units and Addressing
Complete Symbol List
55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92
Symbol M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI 11/1_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI IA M/A Accept_HMI hil Ackn_Fault HMI M_Bays_occup_HMI kil Conv_Fault_HMI 114 MM420_0n_HMI M MM420_Jog_RIGHT HhAl M MM420_Jog_LEFT HMI M SlaveFailure MB SlaveAddress MW ACT MW SETP OB Cycle OB_SlaveFailure OB VVarmRestart L SYSTEM L_MAN L_AUTO L Restart man L Restart aut L Cony Fault L_Fault1 L_Fault2 L_Fault3 L Bay1 L_Bay2 L_Bay3 L_Bay-LB K_Conv_RIGHT K_Conv_LEFT Horn QW_DigDisp QW Control MM420 QW Setp_MM420 OD_Conv_Monitoring VAT 1/0-Conveyor VAT_Numberformats
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Address / 30.3 M M 30.4 M 30.5 M 31 .0 M 33.0 M 33.1 M 40.0 M 40.2 M 40.3 M 86.0 MB 87 MW 20 MW 22 OB 1 OB 86 OB 100 Q 4.1 Q 4.2 Q 4.3 Q 4.5 Q 4.6 Q 5.0 Q 5.1 Q 5.2 Q 5.3 Q 8.1 Q 8.2 Q 8.3 Q 8.4 Q 8.5 Q 8.6 Q 8.7 QW 6 QW 42 QW 44 T 17 VAT 1 VAT 2
Data type ' BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BYTE INT INT OB 1 OB 86 OB 100 BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL WORD WORD INT TIMER
2
Comment Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI) Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, '1'... Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI) Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (HMI) all Bays 1 to 3 occupied Memory bit Conveyor fault Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI) Memory bit MM420 Jog RIGHT (HMI) Memory bit MM420 Jog LEFT (HMI) Memory bit DP Slave has failed DP address of failed slave Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp. OB for cyclic program Error OB for slave failure Warm restart OB Indicator light System ON Indicator light MAN mode Indicator light Automatic mode Indicator light for manual warm restart Indicator light for automatic warm restart Indicator light Conveyor fault Indicator light Fault 1 Indicator light Fault 2 Indicator light Fault 3 Indicator light Bay 1 Indicator light Bay 2 Indicator light Bay 3 Indicator light Light barrier bay Run conveyor RIGHT Run conveyor LEFT Horn BCD digital display Control word for MM420 Setpoint speed for MM420 Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode
Page 7
ST-SERV1 Training Units and Addressing
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Note
SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.8
SITRAIN Training for
RIP Automation and Industrial Solutions
The following pages contain either further information or are for reference to complete a topic.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 8
ST-SERV1 Training Units and Addressing
SIEMENS
2
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Contents of the Training Area
18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.9
SITRAIN Training for Mr Automation and Industrial Solutions
The training area consists of the following components: • An S7-400 programmable logic controller with a CPU 412 or CPU 413-2 DP • Digital input and output modules, analog module • Simulator with digital and analog section • Conveyor model • ET 200S distributed peripheral • MM420 Micromaster with PROFIBUS module • TP170B Touchpanel • Programming device or PC
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 9
ST-SERV1 Training Units and Addressing
SIEMENS
Configuration of the S7-400 Training Unit
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_02E.10
S iTRAlN Traini
Automation and lnTufsotinal Solutions
Design
You can see the design of the S7-400 training unit in the slide above.
Configuration
The UR 1 rack is configured with the following modules: Slot 1: Slot 2: Slot 3: Slot 4: Slot 5: Slot 6: Slot 7: Slot 8: Slot 9: Slot 10: Slot 11: Slot 12: Slot 13: Slot 14: Slot 15: Slot 16: Slot 17: Slot 18:
Addressing
SITRAIN Training for
Power Supply 24V and 5V/20A CPU 412 or other vacant (when the CPU only has a single width) vacant vacant Digital input 32x24V (from simulator) Digital input 32x24V (from conveyor model) Digital output 32x24V 0.5A (to simulator) Digital output 32x24V 0.5A (to conveyor model) Analog input 8x13 Bit (from potentiometer on simulator) vacant vacant vacant vacant vacant vacant
As long as no configuration or parameter settings have been made, the system works with default addresses.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 10
ST-SERV1 Training Units and Addressing
SIEMENS
Installation / Maintenance of the Programmable Logic Controller
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.1
4
1 SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page
Contents
Objectives ........................................................................................................................................ 2 Components for Configuring an S7-300 ...... 3 Mounting Positions for an S7-300 Configuration ...... 4 Expansion Capabilities for an S7-300 ...... 5 Installation Rules ...... 6 ...... 7 Installation Aids 8 Installation Checklist 9 Installing the Rail (Part 1) .... 10 Installing the Rail (Part 2) Checklist for Electrical Configuration .............................................................................................. 11 Wiring the Front Connector ............................................................................................................. 12 13 Preparing for Operation Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-300 ................................................................................... 14 Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-300 ......................................................................................... 15 Changing the Fuse in Digital Output Modules of the S7-300 .......................................................... 16 Using the Electronic Manuals 17 Exercise 1: Using the S7-300 Manuals 18 Exercise 2: Wiring the Signal Modules 19 Installation/Maintenance of the S7-400 Programmable Logic Controller ......................................... 20ff
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 1
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Objectives Upon completion of this chapter the participant will ... be familiar with the basic components for configuring a SIMATIC S7-300/400 understand the function of these basic components know the installation and expansion possibilities of an S7-300/400 know the installation aids for a PLC be able to use the electronic S7 manuals be able to wire digital input and output modules be able to change a backup battery
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.2
Page 2
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Components for Configuring an S7-300 Component
Function
Rail
... is the rack for an S7-300
Power Supply (PS)
... converts the supply voltage (120/230 V) to 24 VDC operation voltage to supply the S7-300
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
... executes the user program accessories: memory module, backup battery
Interface Modules (IM)
... connect the bus between the racks (tiers)
Signal Modules (SM) (Digital/Analog)
... adapt various process levels to the S7-300. accessories: bus connector, front connector
Function Modules (FM)
make functions available, such as for positioning, ... closed-loop control
Communication Processors (CP)
... for communications between programmable logic controllers. accessories: cable, software, interface modules
SIMATIC S7
Date File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.3
SITRAIN Training for IC
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Rail
You snap the power supply, CPU, IM, and up to eight signal modules onto the rail.
Power Supply
The power supply is available in 2A, 5A, and 10A output current at 24V. The output voltage is isolated, short-circuit proof and stable at no load. An LED lights up for error-free operation. The LED flashes when there is an output voltage overload. You use a selection switch to change the primary voltage between 120V and 230V.
Central Processing
The CPU has the following elements on its front side: • Status and error LEDs, • Operating mode selector, removable key with four switch settings, • Connection for 24V supply voltage, • Multipoint interface, MPI, for the programming device or connecting to an additional programmable logic controller, • Battery compartment, (not on Compact_CPUs and CPUs after October, 2002) • Compartment for a memory module (not on the CPU 31X IFM).
Unit (CPU)
Interface Modules
Interface modules make it possible to have a multi-tier configuration.
Signal Modules
These modules are selected according to their voltage range or output voltage. A bus connector is included with each module, which together make up the backplane bus. The process signals are connected to a plug-on front connector.
Interconnecting Cables
You need a PG/PC cable to connect a programming device directly. PROFIBUS cables and cable connectors are also needed to network several programmable logic controllers.
CP
A communication processor for the PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet, and other bus systems.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 3
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Mounting Positions for an S7-300 Configuration
1.01:133
1111111111111111111
1111111111111111111
1111111111111111111 1111111111111111111 1111111111111111111
•
U
U
E
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.092009 SERV1_03E.4
•
■
SITRAIN Training for
V Automation and Industrial Solutions
Mounting Position
The slide above shows the possible horizontal or vertical mounting positions.
Temperature
Depending on the mounting position, you can have the following ambient temperatures for operating the programmable logic controller: • •
0-60°C for a horizontal configuration 0-40°C for a vertical configuration.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 4
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Expansion Capabilities of an S7-300
SIMATIC S7
Date. Ale:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.5
Maximum Expansion The slide above shows the maximum expansion for an S7-300/CPU314/315. The total expansion permits up to 32 modules, with up to eight modules per rack (tier). There are no slot rules for signal modules, function modules, and communications processors. That is, they can be used on any slot. Interface Module (IM)
Interface modules (IM 360/361) are used to loop the bus between the racks. The IMS interface represents the sender, and the IMR interface represents the receiver. The interface modules must be used in their specified slots. If needed, an additional power supply can be provided in the expansion rack. There is the hard-wired IM 365 interface module as an economical variation for the two-tier configuration. (No additional power supply is needed; no CP can be connected).
Local Segment
Certain function modules, such as the FM NC, can have their own I/O assigned to them. This provides an FM module with its own I/O area, which can be accessed very quickly. This I/O area is referred to as a local segment. One local segment can be configured per rack. During running operation, the CPU can no longer access this I/O.
Slot Number
Slots 1 to 3 Slot 1: PS Slot 2: CPU Slot 3: IM Slots 4 to 11 SM, FM, CP
Distance
The following cable lengths are available between the tiers: Two-tier configuration with IM 365: maximum 1m Multi-tier configuration with IM 360/361: maximum 10m
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
(= permanent assignment): (power supply), if present (central processing unit), if present (interface module), if present (free assignment): can be plugged in any slot
Page 5
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Installation Rules
❑ For a horizontal configuration, the CPU and power supply must be arranged on the left. For a vertical configuration, the CPU and power supply must be arranged at the bottom ❑ The following minimum clearances must be maintained: o 20 mm to the right and left of the rack o 40 mm above and below for a single-tier configuration and at least 80 mm between two racks ❑ The interface module always occupies the space next to the CPU ❑ There may be a maximum of eight I/O modules (signal modules, function modules, communication processors) inserted in a rack ❑ A multi-tier configuration is possible for the CPU 314/315/316/317/318 and 319 ❑ Please ensure that there is a low resistance connection, such as through contact washers, between the rail and the substructure. C)
.1
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Rules
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.6
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
The most important rules for the mechanical configuration are listed in the slide above.
(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 6
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV103E.7
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Manuals
For installation, you need the following manuals: • "S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation" • "S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications" • "S7-300 Automation System, CPU Specifications: CPU 31XC and CPU 31X" These manuals are also available electronically.
Parts List
This list specifies the modules of the PLC and where they are configured. The system designer must create this list.
Checklist
Displays the procedure for installation. A suggestion for the sequence is presented on the next page.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 7
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Installation Checklist
• Are all the components available ? (see parts list) • Install the rail ! • Install the power supply ! • Snap a bus connector onto the CPU and install the module ! •
• Snap a bus connector onto each of the I/O modules and install the modules ! • Plug on the front connectors and insert the labeling strips and the slot number ! • Wire the modules (power supply, CPU and I/O modules)
•
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Checklist
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.8
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
The checklist provides only the sequence for the individual activities. The following pages and the manuals contain the exact procedure. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 8
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Installing the Rail (Part 1)
• • Use M6 screws to screw the rail to the substructure! •
• Connect the protective ground conductor to the rail (protective ground screw) . Note: Minimum cross section of the cable = 10mm2. Approx. AWG 7.5. Protective Ground Connection
57.2mml
9 466 mm 500 mm 800 mm
482 mm 530 mm 830 mm
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Mounting Holes
41 A SulT Nn Training ni g toR mA atilo in f or ndustrial Solutions
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.9
The measurement specifications for the mounting holes are indicated in the following table. L1(mm) 32.5 32.5 32.5
Rail Length (mm) 482.6mm 530 mm 830 mm Lt
L2(mm) 57.2 57.2 57.2
L3(mm) 466 500 800
-CO
L2
L3 Screws
You can select from the following screw types to secure the rail: • •
M6 machine screw according to ISO 1207/ISO 1580 (DIN 84/DIN 85) M6 hexagon head cap screw according to ISO 4017 (DIN 4017).
The screw length depends on the substructure. You also need 6.4mm washers according to ISO 7092 (DIN 433)
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 9
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Bus Connector
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.10
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
A bus connector is included with every module. You snap the bus connector onto the module before you install it. Note: Begin with the CPU. No bus connector is snapped onto the last module.
Modules
Hook the modules on the top of the rail in succession. Module sequence: • • •
Power supply CPU Modules.
You then swing down the modules and secure them with the hold-down screw. Front Connector
A front connector is then plugged onto the signal modules to connect the process signals. A mechanical coding between the module and front connector is provided to avoid interchanging the front connectors at a later time.
Slot Number
Labeling strips for the slot number are included with the CPU. You can use these strips to label the module's slot location. The slot number is needed later to configure and assign parameters to the module.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 10
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Checklist for Electrical Configuration
• 1. Are analog signals or bus signals used? 2. Do cables with > 60V exist? •
3 Are inductances switched by additional 3. contacts in the output circuit or independently of the programmable logic controller? 4. Will cables be laid outside of buildings?
•
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.11
SITRAIN Training for •
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Point 1
Shielded cables must be used for analog signals or bus signals (PROFIBUS).
Point 2
When cables are laid with signals > 60 V, you must lay the cables in separate bundles or cable ducts. For signals >400V, you must lay the cables outside of cabinets with a minimum clearance of 10cm.
Point 3
You must connect inductances to an overvoltage protective device. You connect D.C.-controlled coils with diodes or Zener diodes. You connect A.C.-controlled coils with varistors or RC elements.
Point 4
Special lightning protective measures are required here, such as laying cables in metal conduits grounded on both sides.
(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 11
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
• SIEMENS
Wiring the Front Connector ,•■••■..
INV
•
Open the front door of the signal modules ! o Bring the front connector into wiring position ! ❑ Thread the strain reliever in the front connector ! o Strip the insulation from the wires (6 mm length) !
•
o Connect the wires ! a Tighten the strain relief for the cable loom ! a Position the front connector in the operating position ! o Close the front door !
❑ Fill out the labeling strip and insert it in the front door ! • a Attach the slot number to the front door !
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.12
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Cables
Use flexible cables with a cross section of 0.25 to 1.5 mm2. Core end sleeves are not required. If you want to use them, then use only ones without an insulating collar according to DIN 46228 Form A.
Wiring Position
Press the reset button on the top side of the module and drag the front connector to the front until it latches. The front connector has no connection to the module in this position. Wiring is also made easier, because you can more readily access the terminals.
Connection Assignment
Refer to the section about signal modules in the instruction manual. As a rule, M is connected to terminal 20, and L+ is connected to terminal 2 or 1.
Optical Isolation
The digital input modules and output modules are optically isolated. Either eight or 16 inputs or outputs have a common ground or return (M connection).
Cable Length
A cable length of up to 600 m is permitted with unshielded cables (exception: analog modules). The maximum cable length is 1000 m for shielded cables.
Laying Cables
To implement a correct EMC configuration, use the notes in the section on configuring the electrical structure for an S7-300 in the instruction manual. Separate bundles or cable ducts are required when signal cables and heavy current cables (>60 V) are laid together.
Tool
You will require a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 12
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Preparing for Operation
• ❑ Insert the key in the mode selector on the CPU (for CPUs until Oct. 2002)! ❑ Install the backup battery (for CPUs until Oct. 2002)! o
o
•
If the user program is not installed in a non-volatile memory module If larger memory areas must remain retentive during a power failure
❑ For CPUs until Oct. 2002 insert the memory module if required ! o o
So that the user program and the data are retained during Power OFF and without a backup battery To have a larger "load memory" available.
•
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
18.092009 SERV1_03E.13
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Keyswitch
The keyswitch is used to select the operating mode (STOP, RUN, and memory reset). This keyswitch also provides protection for the user program. If the switch is removed in the RUN position, it is possible to read out the user program, but it is not possible to make changes.
Backup Battery
Open the front door of the CPU. Insert the battery connector, with the notch on the left side, into the receptacle in the battery compartment. Push the backup battery into the battery compartment. Close the front door of the CPU.
Memory Module
Before you insert the memory module, you must switch the CPU to the STOP state, or you must switch off the supply voltage.
CPU Memory Reset
A CPU memory reset must be done: • during the initial startup • before a new and complete user program is downloaded • if the CPU requests a memory reset (the STOP LED flashes). Using the keyswitch to perform a memory reset (points 1 to 4) 1.
Turn the power supply on.
2. Turn the keyswitch to the STOP position. 3. Turn the keyswitch to the MRES (Memory Reset) position and hold this position until the STOP LED flashes twice slowly (about 3 seconds). 4. Turn the keyswitch back to STOP and then within one second turn it back to MRES. The STOP LED flashes rapidly to indicate that the memory reset is being done. Note:
SITRAIN Training for
You can also use a PG/PC to perform a memory reset.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 13
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-300
Battery only exists in CPUs that were delivered until Oct. 2002
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.14
Procedure for the S7-300TM
1. Open the front door of the CPU 2. Use a screwdriver to pull the backup battery out of the battery compartment 3. Insert the battery connector, with the notch on the left side, into the receptacle and push the battery into the battery compartment 4. Close the front door of the CPU.
Change Frequency
You should change the battery after one year.
Notes
Only CPU's that were delivered until Oct. 2002 have a backup battery. Change the backup battery during POWER ON only, otherwise the data in the user memory will be lost. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 14
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-300
•
u Switch the CPU to Stop ! u Switch the load voltage off ! O Open the front door ! O Release the front connector and take it out !
•
u Loosen the hold-down screw on the module ! u Swing the module up and off the rack ! o Remove the upper portion of the front connector coding key on the new modules !
•
0 Insert the new module and screw it down tightly !
O Connect the front connector and bring it into operating position! Li Close the front door ! u Switch the load voltage on again ! o Perform a complete restart on the CPU !
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Warning
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.15
11SITRAIN Training for
4
Automation and Industrial Solutions
You are not to exchange modules while there is data traffic via the MPI. If the CPU is not in the STOP mode, there could still be data traffic on the communication bus (MPI). This situation would lead to a system fault. If you are not certain, pull out the connector to the CPU's MPI interface. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
Tool
SITRAIN Training for
You will require a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 15
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Changing the Fuse in Digital Output Modules of the S7-300 —
—
■
,.n..k
• 0 Switch the CPU to Stop ! 0 Switch the load voltage off !
o Remove the front connector ! • o Loosen the hold-down screw on the module ! o Swing the module out ! D Screw the fuse support out of the module ! 0 Change the fuse !
• CI Screw the fuse support down tightly again ! 0 Install the module ! 0 Insert the front connector !
o Switch the load voltage on again !
SIMATIC S7
Date: File
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved .
Which Modules
Automation and lndustnal Solutions
The following digital output modules have fuses: • •
Fuses
111 SITRAIN Trammg for
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.16
SM 322, 16 x AC120V SM 322, 8 x AC 120/230V
You can use the following fuses of the 8A/250V type: • • •
Wickmann Schurter Littlefuse
19 194-8A SP001.013 217.008
(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 16
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS Using the Electronic Manuals FIR ilm
ffj Acrobat Reader - [S7,300_1H8x_e.pdf]. .
.._ .ilu p 2ci
ri fie Edit Qocurnent View Window Help '6
a 51A oli -, MI II I ■ H 1! + + 1101l00%
n
."
D Back to home
1 .5
.
r
1] Se j
■I1
0.- Bookmark ..
6
a5
- ® 1 D NI Is EI 1 7: .i
1 1-' -
D Title
Find What:
EMI
El D 1 Preface D 2 Guide to the S7-330 documentati D3 Installation Order D 4 S7-300 modules 5 Configuring 7,k' f+-[216 Installation - ,E 0 7 Wiring
j
r Match Case r Find Backwards 5
---
.2_1
Manual Collection
0
Cancel
IllI
n
I— Ignore Asian Character Width
Fl
Config uring Summary of the Content Bast Principles of Planning Component dimensions .. Arranging modules on a single rack Arranging modules on mukiple racks 5.6 Selection and installation of cabinets. Example: Selecting a cabinet. 5.7 Elm tical assembly, protective rileOW= Mid gl.ding. 5.5 Grounding concept and overall structure. 5.8.1 Installing an S7-300 web grounded reference potential 5.8.2 histalling an S7-300 with ungrounded reference potential 5.8.3 (not CPU 312 IFM or CPU 314).... bolded or non-lsolated modules? 5.8.4 5.8.5 Grounding. 5.8.6 Overview. Grounding 5.9 Selecting the load powersupply unit . 5.10 Planning subnets , , . . 1 1 e H 8,5 x 11 in 0 : 1=1 IN 5.1 52 5.3 5.4 5.5
-
i.' -C1 Index
El. Manuals
Find A gain
flattery
1"" Match Whole Word Only
.•=--D 8 Addressing l-E-.0 9 Commissionin g ,--D 10 Maintenance ,--D 11 Testing functions, Dia gnostics a += --012 Appendix D13 Glossary
1.
II
I
3 of 256
Date: File:
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. An rights reserved.
1
CI
Find
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.17
. 5-
5
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
When you install the STEP 7 software, you can also install the electronic manuals for STEP 7. You will need the Acrobat Reader software to read the manuals. It can also be found on the STEP 7 CD. The menu options Simatic - Documentation - English take you to a list of existing manuals. SIMATIC manuals (Automation Systems, SW, HMI, Networks) can be ordered as a CD collection.
All
Download
You can download the most recent electronic SIMATIC manuals free of charge from the Internet. Visit the Product Support Homepage (www.siemens.de/Simatic).
Search
To quickly find information, use either the detailed table of contents. You can directly open the pages marked in green with a mouse click. Or, alternatively, you can use the Search function to search for a term, such as, "Battery". As a result, all locations where the term can be found are displayed. Again, you can jump directly to the locations that are marked in green.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 17
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
Chapter 3 Exercisel: Using the S7-300 Manuals 1. How many racks with how many modules each can be installed in the S7-300? max. ............. racks with ............. modules each 2. The PS 307 power supply module, 6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0 (5A output) is designed for an input voltage of .................. VAC or ......................VAC 3. An S7-300 and its various modules rated at 24 VDC have a voltage Tolerance Range of .................... VDC to ................... VDC 4. How many digital inputs and outputs can the CPU 314 address and how large is the process-image input table (PII) and the process-image output table (PIQ)? Process-image input table: ........... bytes = .............. digital inputs Process-image output table: .......... bytes = .............. digital outputs 5. At which voltage levels does the digital input module SM321; D132/24V deliver signal state '0' . ............... V to ........... V signal state 1 '. ......... V to ........... V 6. What is the maximum output current that the digital output module SM322; D032; DC24V/0.5A delivers at signal state '0' . ............... mA (residual current) signal state '1' ......... A 7. What is the maximum operating frequency of this output module ? for resistive load:
......Hz
for inductive load:
...... Hz
8. Is the output module short-circuit proof?
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 18
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Wiring the Signal Modules
M.C.Sw 2
M.C.Sw 1
Power supply
LED
L-
L+
1720
8
13 16
DI/ DO 323 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Task
SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.19
Automation and Industrial Solutions
The following sensors and actuators are to be connected to the digital input and output module 6ES7 323-1BEIxx-OAA0 at Slot 6 : • •
momentary-contact switch 1 at input I 8.0
•
LED at output Q 8.0
momentary-contact switch 2 at input I 8.5
What to Do
In the picture complete the necessary wiring. Also consider the power supply of the sensors, actuators and the module.
Note
Use the manual for the terminal assignment or use the wiring diagram on the inside of the digital module's front door.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 19
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Installation / Maintenance of the S7-400 Programmable Logic Controller
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_038.20
g SITRAIN Training for la
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents
Page
Components for Configuring an S7-400 ............................................................................................ Racks and Connection Possibilities Installation Rules Installation Checklist Installing Racks Installing Modules Wiring the Power Supply Wiring the Front Connector .............................................................................................................. Preparing for Operation ..................................................................................................................... Changing the Backup Battery .......................................................................................................... Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-400 .......................................................................................
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 20
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Components for Configuring an S7-400 Component
Function
Rack
for receiving and establishing an electrical connection to the modules
Power Supply (PS)
converts the supply voltage to 5 VDC and 24 VDC to supply the modules
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
executes the user program accessories: Memory Card
Signal Modules (SM) (Digital/Analog)
adapt various process signals to the S7-400 accessories: front connector
Interface Modules (IM)
connect the racks with one another accessories: connector cables, terminators
Function Modules (FM)
make functions available, such as for positioning and closed-loop control
Communication Processors (CP)
for communications between programmable logic controllers accessories: cable, software, interface modules
SIMATIC S7
Date:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.21
41 SITRAIN Training for 6
46
,,
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction
You need the components specified in the slide above to configure an S7-400.
Accessories
The specified accessories must be ordered separately. Refer to the ST 70 catalog.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 21
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Racks and Connection Possibilities Usable as
Type of Rack
UR1 / UR2 (Universal Rack)
Central rack
i Expansion : rack 1
P Bus
Yes
Yes
K Bus
i
CR2 (Central Rack)
P Bus, Segment 1
P Bus, Segment 2
Yes
No
K Bus
ER1 / ER2
(Expansion Rack)
P Bus
Yes
No
/1
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.22
VIZ
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
UR1/UR2
Racks that can be used as central and as expansion racks. The UR1 rack has 18 slots and the UR2 has 9 slots for S7-400 modules.
CR2/CR3
Rack used as a central rack. The I/O bus (Peripheral bus) is divided into two segments with 10 and 8 slots. The communication bus is continuous. The CR3 rack with only four slots is designed for distributed automation solutions.
ER1/ER2
Racks used as expansion racks. ER1 has 18 slots and ER2 has 9 slots. The I/O bus has the following restrictions: • • •
Connecting CR/ER
no interrupt processing no 24V supply for the modules no backup of the modules.
You need interface modules (IM) to connect expansion racks (ER) to the central rack (CR). You can insert one or more send IMs in the central rack. The send IM has 2 interfaces. You can connect 4 expansion racks to each interface. The IM modules make a distinction between local and remote ranges. • Local range: Distance up to 3m with the 460-0/461-0 interfaces. The 5V is not transmitted with these interfaces, however the K bus is. Distance up to 1.5m with the 460-1/461-1 interfaces. The 5V is transmitted with these interfaces, however the K bus is not. • Remote range: Maximum distance of 100m with the 460-3/461-3 interfaces.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 22
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Installation Rules
o You must maintain the following minimum clearances: o 20 mm to the right and left of the rack o 40 mm above and 22 mm below the rack o
110 mm between two racks
0 The power supply must be inserted on the far left (slot 1) and
the receive IM must be inserted on the far right D Please ensure that there is a low-resistance connection between the rack and substructure, such as through contact washers LI Connect the rack to building ground with at least 10 mm2 cable o Remove the slot covers before you install the modules
/ SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Rules
w
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.23
7'SITRAIN
lit:
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
The most important rules for installing an S7-400 are given in the slide above. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 23
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Installation Checklist
■
ANY ■Nis,
• Are all components available ? (see parts list) • Install the rack ! • Install the power supply ! • Remove the slot covers and install the modules ! • Connect the front connectors and insert the labeling strips! • Wire the modules (power supply and I/O modules) !
•
SIMATIC S7
Date File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Checklist
w
SITRAIN
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.24
4' SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industnal Solutions
The checklist provides only the sequence for the individual activities. The following pages and the manuals contain the exact procedure. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 24
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Installing Racks
• ❑ Screw the rack to the substructure (M6 machine screws) ! •
❑ Connect the rack to building ground. A stud bolt is provided on the lower left for this purpose. The minimum cross section of the cable is 10 mm2 ! ❑ Install additional racks with a minimum clearance of 110 mm !
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_038.25
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction
The racks are designed for installation on walls and installation in frames and cabinets.
Mounting
The rack has four cutouts on the side for mounting. The cutouts are suitable for 19 inch frames. You can use the following screws: • •
M6 Machine screw according to ISO 1207/ISO 1580 (DIN 84/85) M6 Hexagon head cap screw according to ISO 4017 (DIN 4017)
You also need 6.4 mm washers according to ISO 7092 (DIN 433).
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 25
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Installing Modules MID
• ❑ Remove the slot covers. Grasp the cover at the indicated locations and pull the cover forward to remove it !
• ❑ Hang on the first module and swing it down !
•
❑ Screw the module tight on the top and the bottom. Triple-width modules and the power supply each have two screws on the top and on the bottom ! ❑ Install the other modules as before !
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.26
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Layout
The power supply must be inserted on the far left (slot 1). The receive interface module (receive IM), if used, must be inserted in the extreme right slot of the rack it's in.
Tool
You need a screw driver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 26
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Wiring the Power Supply 01.
•
❑
Open the power supply cover !
❑ Adjust the voltage selector switch to the correct supply voltage I ❑ Use a screwdriver as a lever to loosen the power plug ! ❑ Pull out the power plug !
•
❑ Shorten the hot and neutral wires (not the ground) by 10 mm ! ❑ Strip the insulation to a length of 7 mm ! ❑ Open the power plug (screw in the cover) and the strain relief device ! ❑ Connect the wires and tighten the strain relief device ! ❑ Close the power plug cover !
•
❑
Push the power plug to a dead stop in the guide notch on the power supply !
SIMATIC S7
Date:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Cables
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.27
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
You can use the following cables: • rigid: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 • flexible: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 • core end sleeve: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 without an insulating collar according to DIN 46228, Form A
Tool
You need a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 27
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Wiring the Front Connector
❑ Use a lever motion on the lower part of the front connector cover to loosen it. Open the cover and pull it up to remove it ! ❑ Strip the insulation from the wires !
•
❑ Connect the wires ! ❑ Install the strain relief device on the lower side of the front connector ! ❑ Fill out the labeling strip and insert it in the front connector !
•
❑ Place the cover on the front connector ! ❑ Latch the front connector onto the module's coding key ! ❑ Swing the front connector up ! ❑ Screw the front connector tightly in place !
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Front Connector
SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.28
Automation and Industrial Solutions
There are three different types of front connector: • crimp connection • screw-type terminal • spring connection You can insert the front connector only if the module is installed and screwed down tightly.
Note
The front connectors have a jumper that is needed by some modules. Do not remove this jumper.
Cables
You can use the following cables: •
Tool
flexible: 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 for a crimp connection 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 for screw-type or spring connection
You need a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width. (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 28
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS Preparing for Operation
•
O Insert the key in the mode selector switch! O Insert the backup battery (or batteries) ! o Adjust the BATT INDIC switch for monitoring the battery on the power supply !
•
0 Insert the memory card in the CPU .
O Connect the racks using the correct connector cables ! •
D Set the rack number (1 to 21) on the coding key of every receive IM ! O Connect a terminator to the last receive IM of every coupling phase ! o Perform a CPU memory reset ! D Connect the programming device !
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.29
SITRAIN
gip Automation and Industrial Solutions Training for
Keyswitch
The keyswitch is used to select the operating mode (STOP, RUN, and Memory Reset). This keyswitch also provides protection for the user program. If the keyswitch is removed in the RUN position, it is possible to read out the user program, but it is not possible to make changes.
Backup Battery
Depending on the power supply, you can install one or two backup batteries to buffer the user program and the retentive bit memories, timers, counters and data blocks. You can also connect an external battery to the EXT.-BATT. receptacle on the CPU.
Memory Module
Before you insert the memory module, the CPU must be switched to STOP. There are two types of memory cards: • •
CPU Memory Reset
RAM cards for extending the internal load memory Flash Cards for storing the user program in a power failure-proof way
A CPU memory reset must be done: • • •
during the initial startup before a new and complete user program is downloaded upon CPU request of a memory reset (the STOP LED flashes).
Using the keyswitch to perform a memory reset (points 1 to 4) 1. Turn the power supply on. 2. Turn the keyswitch to the STOP position. 3. Turn the keyswitch to the MRES (Memory Reset) position and hold this position until the STOP LED flashes twice slowly (about 3 seconds). 4. Turn the keyswitch back to STOP and then within one second turn it to MRES until the STOP LED flashes rapidly. You can also use a PG/PC to perform a memory reset.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 29
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-400
Open the power supply cover ! CI Use the ribbon loop to pull the battery (batteries) out of the battery
compartment !
•
J Insert the new battery and pay attention to the polarity !
Set the BATTINDIC switch for battery monitoring: ) BAT position for a single-width power supply ) 1BAT position for a double or triple-width PS and one battery 2BAT position for a double or triple-width PS and two batteries •
Use the FMR acknowledgement pushbutton to reset the fault indicator !
❑ Close the cover to the power supply !
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.30
SrRAlN T rain
Iar Autom ation a nd In l strial Solutions
Change Frequency
You should change the battery after one year.
Note
Change the backup battery during POWER ON only or with a connected external supply. Otherwise, the data in the user memory will be lost.
ICI
(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 30
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-400
• J Switch the CPU to STOP or make sure that the user program permits modules to be exchanged in the RUN state !
0 Loosen the hold-down screws of the front connector and remove the front connector ! • _.i Loosen the hold-down screws on the module and swing the module out
0 Hang in the new module of the same type and swing it down ! 0 Use both screws to screw the module down tightly ! •
3 Remove the front part of the coding key from the module ! 0 Connect the wired front connector and tighten it ! i Switch the CPU to RUN . (if it was switched to STOP)
110 / SIMATIC S7
Date' File:
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved
18.09.2009 SERV1_03E.31
SITRAIN Training for 4,1
Automation and Industrial Solutions
(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation" manual).
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 31
ST-SERV1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
The SIMATIC Manager SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project DAS7_Courses\My_Proje]
a
Fie Eck Insert PLC View Options Window Help
'1= 1; g? O Fr; My_Project in 67_300 Station
ei
i
re' fas
I E. 11 CPU 315-2 DP S7_300_Sle Ch6 Analog — CO Sources iA Blocks MICROMASTER_42C TP170B_Color WinCC flexible RT IEFQ Ch07 Error Sources Blocks
rth
< No Filter >
Si ' TP170B_Colot
Ch07_Er1OF
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
PROFIBUS[1)
ICP5611(PROFIBLIS)
Press Fl to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
WIN)
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.1
I
le'
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page
Contents Objectives From Process to Project
2
STEP 7 Project Structure Interesting Facts about Multiprojects
4
Creating an S7 Project
6
Inserting an S7 Program Standard Library ............................
7
STEP 7 Help System .................... Context-Sensitive Help in STEP 7
9
3 5
8 10 11
Setting the PG/PC Interface .... Project: OFFLINE / ONLINE View
12
"Accessible Nodes": ONLINE View (project-independent)
13
Erasing a Memory Card (Memory or MMC Card) Exercise 1: Setting the PG Interface to MPI
........ 14
Exercise 2: Performing a CPU Memory Reset and a Warm Restart Exercise 3: Retrieving a Project and Saving It as "My_Project"
........ 16
If You Want to Know More SIMATIC Manager Customizing Options
........ 18
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
........ 15
17 19
Page 1
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... understand the project structure in the SIMATIC Manager understand the function "accessible nodes" be familiar with the offline / online view in the SIMATIC Manager be familiar with the STEP7 Standard Libraries be familiar with the STEP7 help system be able to create and manage a project with the SIMATIC Manager be able to set the PG's interface be able to erase an MMC be able to perform an S7 CPU memory reset
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.2
Page 2
gor
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
From Process to Project Project Management
SIMATIC Manager
< Hardware
Communication
FB21 OB1 11.0 I1 1 H
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.3
Q4.0 )
Software 4—
%...T
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Process
When you take a closer look at a process you want to automate, you will find that it is made up of a multitude of smaller sections and sub-processes, which are all interlinked and dependent on one another. The first, most important task is to break down the automation process as a whole into separate sub-tasks.
Hardware and Software
Each sub-task defines certain hardware and software requirements which the the automation system must fulfill: Hardware: - Number and type of inputs and outputs - Number and type of modules - Number of racks - Capacity and type of CPU - HMI systems - Communication structures • Software: Program structure Data management for the automation process Configuration data and parameter assignment data - Communication data Program and project documentation
Project
In SIMATIC S7 all the hardware and software requirements of an automation process are managed within a project. A project includes the necessary hardware (+ configuration), networking (+ configuration), all the programs, and the entire data management for an automation solution.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 3
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
STEP 7 Project Structure SIMA I IC Manager
[ My
Project DAS 7 ProjektelMein_Pro ]
Fie Edit Insert PLC New Options Window Help
D HI
1r
- x
FiE
III ! 0
< No Filter >
17%Eir
Z.IY, la*
7
Fr
SIMATIC 300(1) CPU 315-2 DP SIMATIC Touchpenel Chap14_Faults MF1(1) PR0FIBUS(1) 300(1) [11 ChapOttfigital_Op al Sources { Blocks SIMATIC Manager [My Pro ject -- D:157-Pro jekteWein Pro ] ,T i MICRONIASTER 1993 Edit Insert PLC New Options W dow He Touchpanel E d Chap14_Faults Rai pH © ft I < No Fits > Sweet My_ Project , la Blocks SIMATIC 30011) 4E+ ID. cf H III CPU 315-2 DP System data OB1 FC14 FC15 rr Chap09_cicitl_Op al Sources
i
Drii:I PINIX
a
E
rF
FC16
Cd Enla
j MICROMASTER_420
Touchpanel
FC17
FC18
FC19
VAT_Numbe_
:, a Chap14_Faults
Sources Blocks
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.4
SITRAIN Training for Mr' , Automation and Industrial Solutions
Project Structure
Data is stored in a project in the form of objects. The objects in a project are arranged in a tree structure (project hierarchy). The tree structure displayed in the project window is similar to that in the Windows Explorer. Only the icons for the objects are different.
Project Hierarchy
1st. Level:
SITRAIN Training for
The first level contains the project icon. Each project represents a database where all the relevant project data are stored. 2nd. Level: • Stations (such as the S7-300 station) are where information about the hardware configuration and parameter assignment data of modules is stored. Stations are the starting point for configuring the hardware. • S7 Program folders are the starting point for creating (writing) programs. All the software for a parameter-assignable module from the S7 range is stored in an S7 Program folder. This folder contains further folders for the program blocks and sources. • Subnets (MPI, PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet) are part of an overall network. 3rd. and subsequent levels: Depends on the object type of the next-higher level.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 4
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Interesting Facts about Multiprojects ,LEAAI
IcSIMATIC Manager - [PROI_SOL -- \ Sl_Courses PRO3_Loe \PRE13 Joe] File Edit Insert KC View Options Widow He
sa
lbelltIlra-liii74:rErainli < No Filter > IE 6g PRO1 SOL E Ethernet GE , I_ E SIMATIC 300-LEFT E E III CPU 315-2 DP_MPI 4 S7-Communication 1:1 al Sources i2 Blocks SIMATIC 300_RIGHT • E 9 Message_L Message_R ▪ S7-Sokitions E SFC_Correnunicatim SIMATIC 300-LEFT EE SIMATIC 300_RIGHT E MeldeRezept_L E • Melde_Rezept_R
g
.7-1
4
-G
JslxJ
I
T5
M
It?
111 SIMATIC SIMATIC Message_L Message_R MPI(1) 300_LEFT 300_RIGHT
g
1
Press Fl b3 get Help.
1035611(PROFIBUS)
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.5
ji SITRAIN Automation and Industrial Solutions Training for
Multiproject
A multiproject folder is a folder for all projects and libraries of an automation solution that contains one or more STEP 7 projects and, optionally, also libraries. The projects within the multiproject can contain objects with crossproject interrelations (such as cross-project S7 connections).
Benefits
When projects are a component of a multiproject, their scope can be smaller and easier to follow. With the help of the multiproject you can, for example, create a project for every operator for distributed editing and divide the stations according to their operator between the projects. Cross-project functions make sure that you can almost handle a multiproject like one single project. Examples of cross-project functions • Cross-project functions in STEP 7 (basic package): • Save As (save multiproject with all projects in another location) • Archiving (multiproject with all projects) • Adjustment of cross-project networking (such as, bringing together subnets) • Updating the view (all projects of a multiproject)
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 5
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Creating an S7 Project File PLC View Options Window Help Ctrl+N New Project' Wizard... Open...
User projects I Libraries Multiproiects
Ctr1+0
57 Memory Card Memory Card File
a
Ethernet 121:157_Courses \PR 0 3_Loe \Ethernet GD-Communication DAS7_Courses5PRO3_Loe GD-Kommu Et) Lueftunglnitialserung D:157_Couises1LueftunglnitialisierungsT est D:157_Kurse SERVl_L 57-Solutions D: \97_Courses \PR 03_Loe1S7-Loesu SERV1_A D: S7_Couises \SERVLA ENcrovi c \c7 1-',.....-.ACCP1/1 I
Delete... Reorganize... Manage...
amy_pro,ect a
Archive... Retrieve.,.
r Add to current multiproject
Page Setup... 1 PRO1_50L (Multiproject) DA57_Courses \PRO3_Loe \PRO3_Loe 2 SER92_B (Project) -- DA57_Courses SIERV2_B 3 SERV/2_5 (Project) -- DA57_Courses \SERY2_1. Exit
.17.••.
Type:
N
*
1My_Project
Alt+F4
I %Oct
rF
.• ....... ** r
5jareSPADcalin
t1DAS7_Courses
Browse..
OK
care'
Creates a new project or a new library.
SIMATIC S7
Date. File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_048 6
Library
qt.
I
Heo
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
SIMATIC Manager
The SIMATIC Manager is normally started by double-clicking on the "SIMATIC Manager" icon which appears on the Windows desktop after the STEP 7 Basic Package has been installed.
Creating a Project
Select the menu options File 9 New or the icon in the toolbar to open the "New" dialog box for creating a new project or a new library. Enter the project name in the "Name" box and click the "OK" button to confirm.
Notes
1. The "Storage location (path)" displays the path that was preset in the SIMATIC Manager under Options -> Customize. 2. You can also use the "New Project" Wizard to help you create a new project. Select File 9 New project and follow prompts.
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 6
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Inserting an S7 Program ..141z.1 Fie Edt rjreat PLC View Options Window Help D fa;
Raba, Subnet
I [i
21,
R
Ill I
a II
ail
ra MI I it?
I 57 PT
2 M7 Program
S7 Software
3 Program
57 Sock
4 Drive
I'17 Software
5 51NAMIC5
Symbol Table Text Library External Source,.. WinCC flexible PT
WVICC Object Parameter External parameters... Z17My_Projer I - Di 57_Courses My_Proje
.pew)
-
2 Global labeling held
..1412..1 c
%
Inserts 57 Program at the cursor position.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Inserting a Program
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E 7
.619.
-.T.
Training for S TRAIN 1 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Select the Insert - Program - S7 Program menu to insert a new program into the current project. When you insert an object, the system automatically gives it a relevant name, such as "S7 Program(1)". You can then change this name if you like.
Note
You use the method described above to create a hardware-independent program. Programs assigned to particular hardware are described in the "Hardware Configuration" chapter.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 7
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Standard Library
New Project' Wizard...
User projects
Libraries I Sawn projects I Multiprojects I
■ Name SIC4 • • • es PDIAGUB CAPrograrn Fies1Siemens1StepTS71/ es PROF1NET System-Lbary CAProgram FienSiemenatep71S7ft tik Redundant 10 (VI j CAPromarn Files1SiernenatepTS7k es Redundant 10 CGP CAProgram Fies1Siemens1StepTS71/ tek SIMATIC_NET CP CAPrcgram Fie:VS iemens1StepTS7R 4 611823MMIIMERIZEI■ ,... we stdlibs (V2) CAProgram Files1Siemens1Step7 \ S71117
S7 Memory Card Memory Card Fie Delete... Reorganize... ArcNve... Retrieve... Page Setup.,.
2-1—
1 My_Project (Project) - DA57_Courses/MyProje 2 PROI_SOL (Mull:Project) - DAS7_CousesIP1103_LoekPRO3_Loe 3 SERV28 (Project) - DA57_Coursest.SERV23 4 SERV2_5 (Project) - D1,57Couses 5ERV2J. Ext
Selected
At+F4
Use Projects: Lbaries: Sample Projects: Multiprojects: OK
,
,Standard Library -- C:'" Program Files' ,.Siernens Step7 571ibs stdlib30
Opens a project to be selected or a t
7.WIMI1111101
Browse... Cancel l
Help
—11:11.2s1
Comm cation Blocks d IEC Function Blocks d Organization Blocks Id Miscellaneous Blocks PID Coned Blocks a S5-S7 Convertng Block: AD System Function Blocks TI-S7 Convertng Block:
-' zv
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.8
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction
Libraries are used to store reusable blocks. The blocks can be copied into a library from existing projects or they can be created directly in the library independent of projects.
Standard Library
A Standard Library is installed when you install STEP 7. You can access this standard library from the SIMATIC Manager (File 4 Open 4 Libraries) or from the Block Editor ( Overviews 4 Libraries). The library contains the following S7 programs : Communication Blocks: Functions (FC) for communication between the CPU and the distributed I/O via communication processors. Organization Blocks: Organization Blocks (OBs). S5-S7 Converting Blocks: Blocks that emulate STEP 5 standard function blocks and that are necessary for converting STEP 5 programs. TI-S7 Converting Blocks: Generally usable standard functions such as analog value scaling. IEC Function Blocks: Blocks for IEC functions (IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission), such as for processing time and date information, for string processing and for selecting maximum and minimum. PID Control Blocks: Function blocks (FBs) for PID closed-loop controls. System Function Blocks: System Functions (SFCs) and System Function Blocks (SFBs). Miscellaneous Blocks: FCs and FBs for switching between daylight savings time and standard time (summer and winter times).
Note SITRAIN Training for
Additional libraries are added when optional software is installed.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 8
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
STEP 7 Help System .1212.1 c
Manager He PLC View Options
window I Help
DUM?1,1,101 Contents
11
Introduction Getting Started
Press Hot-key Fl
Using He About
Project Object Provides various waysto ea
The project represents the entirety of all the data and programs in an automation solution, and is located at the top of an object hierarchy . Position in the Project View
a
Proiect Object Station Object
Project Station
I
Programmable Module Obied S7147 Program Object
Progr. Module
Source File Folder Object Block Folder Object
.1.1;11 S7 Program .;J Source F il es Blocks
Example
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.9
ingufsor radi nin tri . n Automation T
d
Obtaining Help
There are various ways of obtaining help: Contents menu to activate the general help. 1. You use the Help 2. You use the Fl hot-key or the icon in the toolbar to start the contextsensitive help.
Tabs
• •
"Hot words"
al Solutions
"Contents": Displays a list of help topics under general headings. Allows you to access the help information by displaying a list "Index": of available terms in alphabetical order. Enables you to look for certain words or expressions in the • "Search": help topics. Certain words are highlighted in green and are underlined with a broken line in the help texts (called "Hot words"). A mouse click on these "Hot words" leads to a further help text with detailed information.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 9
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Context Sensitive Help in STEP 7 r„,,,MA I IF manager - [St andard t diraity -- 1: ",Program Files >, Siernens Step] \ •
.J.01LI c ..1212g
stdlib90]
Pie Eh Wert PLC New Optia-ss Virdow Help
ll ou;11?1,1J6 u•anisaia Luray •
Coarrxxxcaoon Blocks
ivi ,J IEC Function Blocks
±rI Misceleneous Blocks ± Organcation Blocks • IA PID Control Blocks • S5-S 7 Converting Blocks System Function Blocks a Blocks • al TI 07 Converting Blocks
Fire >
111 ==11=2!!!!=11111111i11 SFC2
p SFC3 p SFC4 2 SFCS SFC6
S0 SFC7 p SFC9 7 SFC10
p SFC11 p SFC12 p SFC13 p SEC14 S:/ S FC1 5 t;i• SFC17
STL OIL
SET_RTM CT RL_R TM
••• System fu • System Iwiction
Press Hot-key Fl
1.0
Fie Edit Bookmark Options Help LWent. I
Ind"
I
I
E"
I
Sc
Reading the Time with SFC 1 "READ_CLK"
I
2
'
I Help on STEP 7[
Glossary
I
Description With SFC 1 'READ_CLK" (read system clock), you read the current date or current time of the system clock of the CPU
kignmAtil
Ennakiti011
RET_VAL OUTPUT
1NT
1, 0, M. D. L
7 an error occurs during the execution of the function, the return value contains an error code
CDT
DT
D,L
The current date and current time are output at the CDT output.
PararnelN Declaration
Press Fl to get Help.
1110111111111=1111111111117Amml
OUTPUT
Error Information See Chapter Evaluatina Errors with the Output Parameter RET VAL See also:
Etrarnole of an SFC 0 (SET Cl..14.1/ SFC 1 (READ CLK1- task
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.10
SITRAIN Training for ‘0111 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Context-Sensitive Help ...
With the context-sensitive help, you can find information directly connected to the selected object. As the slide shows, the object can be a system function or it can be an STL instruction in a block, for example.
... Activating
You can activate the context-sensitive help from any tool by selecting the relevant object and then pressing the Fl function key. Use the "Help on STEP 7" button to jump from the context-sensitive help to the general help.
Note
You can find additional information on STEP 7 in the electronic manuals. Choose the following menu options to open the electronic manuals: Start - Simatic - Documentation
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 10
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Setting the PG/PC Interface STEP 7
Access Point of the Application: S7ONLINE
Access Path 1 Access Pont of **Application
IS7ONLINE (STEP
71 -> CP5611(MPI)
(Standard for STEP 7) Interface Parameter Assignment Used: Properties
ICP5611(MPI)
Diagnostic
cP5si t impo CP5611(PPI) CP5611PROFIBUS DP Slave)
I
Copy._
Zj CP56111PROFIB U S I ._
2sJ
Properties - CP5611(MPI)
Parameter assign communications MPI network) - Interlaces -Add/Remove.
CP5611
Interface Parameter Assignment Used: CP5611 (MPI)
OK
MPI - Station Parameters
r
PG /PC is the only master on the bus
Address:
10
Timeout.
II
s
Network Parameters
CPU
Transmission Rate:
1187.5 Kbps
Highest Station Address:
1 31
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date: File'
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.11
Default
Cancel I
I
V
I
Help
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
General
You use the "Set PG/PC Interface" tool to define the connection between an application such as STEP 7 and a module such as CP 5611. The tool is activated with Start - Settings 9 Control Panel .
Access Point
Other examples of access points are: •
CP_H1_1 for SIMATIC NET (Ethernet)
•
CP_L2_1 for SIMATIC NET (PROFIBUS)
•
DPSONLINE for ProTool/Pro DP-Slave
•
Micro/Win for the S7-200 software
•
MPI (WinCC) for the WinCC Software
Interface Parameter Assignment Used
Here, enter the module used, such as, CP5611 and the interface used, such as, MPI. If you connect the PG to the PROFIBUS, use the setting CP5611 (PROFIBUS). To save a switch-over of the PG/PC interface, you can also use the setting CP5611 (Auto). The bus parameters are then automatically determined. With this setting, however, the connection takes longer.
Properties
In this tab, you adapt the parameters of the interface. For "Address", enter the MPI address of the PG. This must be unique in the network. To make communication possible, the "Transmission Rate" and "Highest Node Address" parameters must be the same for all nodes (stations). The "PG/PC is the only master on the bus" setting is only activated if only slaves are connected to the PG.
Diagnostics
With this, you can check whether a connection can be made.
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 11
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Project: OFFLINE / ONLINE View
JJJ
File Edit Insert PLC View g3tions Window Help
D: \ Courses \MyProject
MyPropect S7_300_Station E ▪ II CPU 315-2 DP S7program j:j Sources
a
Systemdaten
-=J
'
0061
Plod
▪
1.1 '9 I I/ gl 1 riAi
II
I
l'..:MyProject
FC1
....... FC14
0
MICROMASTER_420 Touchpanel
FC17
FC18
FC15
Project OFFLINE
0-
.. 7E16 .....
........
•
e
FC19
Press Fl to get Help.
Q .....
". • .s. [CT—
VAT I/O-Co... VAT_Numbe.. ICP5611(PROFIBUS)
VSIMATIC Manager - MyProject
File Edit Insert PLC itelW gAtions Window Help ..
Project ONLINE ..•
774 myProlect ...••• S7,30Intation ...rill CPU 315-2 DP ••• j E1 1:j S7program
a 0. Systemdaten
a
• MICROMASTER_420 5 g Touchpanel
061
0- 0FC17
FC18
Press F1 beet Help.
CF
0
FC1
FC14
L1,11101% F
0-
0-
FC15
FC16
CF FC19 'Filtered ja5611(PRCCEIUS)
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.12
A
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Offline View
In the project window of the SIMATIC Manager, the offline view displays the project structure stored on the hard disk of the programming device. • The "S7 Program” folder contains the "Sources" and "Blocks" objects. • The "Blocks" folder contains the system data created with the HWConfig tool and the blocks created with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor.
Online View
The online view shows the offline project structure in the left window and in the right window it shows the blocks stored online in the selected CPU. As a result, the "S7 Program" seen in the online view only contains the "Blocks" folder which contains the following objects: • System data (SDB) • User blocks (OB, FC, FB) • System blocks (SFC, SFB). The title bar in the online window is highlighted in color.
Changing Views
Changing between offline and online view takes place: • through the View - Offline or View - Online menu items or with the corresponding icon in the toolbar: - Online - Offline
Note
You can arrange the "ONLINE" and "OFFLINE" views next to each other (as in the slide) or under each other with Window - Arrange - vertical (horizontal)
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 12
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
"Accessible Nodes": ONLINE View (project-independent)
r--1 1-711X Insert PLC View Options Window He e File Ed/ ..... 4 ea - , .11 as
=
in Accleisible Nodes = (73 PROFIBUS - 2
aPROFIBUS - 4 (passive)
iiSystem data
0 FB2 0. FB31 gFC50 0. DB30 0 DB40 gSFBO a. SFB4 gSFB53 0. SFCO a. SFC4 0. SFC11 0. SFC15 0. SFC20 a. SFC24 0. SFC31
- 151 X
rth M=1
I < No Fier>
0 0131 0 FB3 0 F899 gFC105 gDB31 0 DB99 0.SFEI1 0 SFB5 0. SFB54 0 SFC1 0 SFC5 0. SFC12 0. SFC17 0. SFC21 0. SFC28 gSFC32
0 0835 gFB4 0 FC31 a. DB10 0. DB32 0 08112 0. SFB2 10 SFB32 gSFB75 0 SFC2 0 SFCS 0. SFC13 a. SFC18 0. SFC22 0. SFC29 0. SFC33
J'Ytt
ar
0FB1 0. FB 30 0 FC42 0. DB20 g01333 a. DB123 0. SFB3 0. SFB52 0.SF1381 0 SFC3 0. SFC7 0. SFC14 0. SFC19 0 SFC23 0. SFC30 0. SFC34
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.13
SITRAIN Training for gr
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Area of Use
This type of connection provides you with quick access, such as for service purposes. You can access all accessible programmable modules (CPUs, FMs, CPs) in the network. You choose this method when you don't have any project data about the target systems on your PG.
What to Do
You can activate the "Accessible Nodes" window with the menu options PLC 9 Display Accessible Nodes. In the "Accessible Nodes" object, all accessible programmable blocks in the network are displayed with their address.
Note
Nodes (stations) that are not programmable with STEP 7 can also be displayed (such as programming devices or operator panels). On the CPU to which the PG is connected, the addition (directly) is displayed. In the slide, the CPU with the MPI address =2.
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 13
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Erasing a Memory Card (Memory or MMC Card) Memory card is inserted in the CPU: FIe Egt..Insert
.
D QUIT 111ft
•
PLC
View
Ea
t •
Window
He
X lib
Accessible Nodes Etiji r PROFIBUS = 2 to Blocks PROFIBUS = 4 (passive)
. z
Options
• • ••••
System data FB1 rat FB 4 FB99 FC50 DB20
081 la FB2 fa FB30 ta FC31 FC105 DB30
rt II
o < No
OB35 FB3 CZt FB31 la+ FC42 0811 DB3
"•-. ................. ..-• right •-. mouse button
Memory card is inserted in the PG:
.••
livert PLC View Options Window
O
M,)it,w6hf
❑
i Lit 57 rn8frori) card ,
..•—"•...••••••
r+ System data Ca. FB1 0. FB4 co. FB99
Fc5o DB.?
••„ ,••
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Reason
I
A
Open Object
ctri+Alt+o
Cut Copy
Ctrl+X Ctrl+C
Delete
Del
Compare Blocks...
1 lr.J11-_1 " 01'1
SIMATIC Manager [S7 memory card] J File Edit
x
Fitter >
a
No Piker
s # 081 0 FB2 sp FB30 a. FC31 a. FC105 DB30
18.09.2009 SERV1_04E.14
# 0835
a FB3 0. FB31 ta. FC42 tg. D B1 0 SI. IB 1
SITRAIN gr
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
During a CPU memory reset, only the RAM work memory of the CPU is reset, not the memory of the possibly inserted memory or MMC card. That means that the user program stored on the inserted memory card is retained.
Erasing the memory card can oe done in the following ways: Memory Card is Inserted in the CPU
The memory card can be erased online directly on the CPU using the function "Accessible Nodes":
SIMATIC Manager -4 PLC 9 Display Accessible Nodes then select all blocks .9 Delete Memory Card
IT]
The memory card can be erased using a programming device with a suitable interface. For this, the memory card must be inserted in the module slot and a new window has to be opened that displays the contents of the memory card.
SIMATIC Manager 9 File 9 S7 Memory Card 9 Delete...
Note
The data format of SIMATIC MMCs does not correspond to the data format that is used by MS Windows. Accordingly, SIMATIC MMCs can not be read, written or erased with the Windows Explorer!
Caution
If SIMATIC MMCs are formatted in MS Windows, then they can no longer be used in a SIMATIC S7!
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 14
ST-SERV1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Setting the PG Interface to MPI SIMATIC Manager Options Access Path I Access Poitt of the Application I S7ONLINE
(STEP 7)
CP5611(MPI I
(Standard tot STEP 7) Interface Patameter Magmata Used: Properties..
CP5611(MPI) 11112=1 — CP5611IPPI) CP5611(PROFIBUS - DP Slave] _J "itgl CP5611 (PR Fl BUS) Settings menu options.
Note
This function makes the loaded or diagnosed stations more transparent, however also increases the load memory requirements!
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 14
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
Saving the Setpoint Configuration and Downloading it in Modules
JJ jc
HW Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project] el Station Edit Insert PLC View °Mons Window Help Ctd+N C C81+0 Open ONLINE nose
j2s1
Save
=
Ctr1+5
Consistency Check Cher 1.
C131+Alt+IC Ctrl+Alt+F
Compatibility
004+P
Print Preview... Page Setup...
Fanwee
1 My Project\SIMATIC 300(1) 2 LusftungInitialsierung‘57_300 Ration 3 My_Project1,S7_300 Statim 4 SE.118‘2_,RS7 31309tabon •
D
MPI a.. I add... Q... Commit 2 0...3
Alt+F4
Exit
7 11 Al2x1213it 8
Download
8 8 304...307
SES 7 331.M601-n48o
(only when CPU is in STOP mode)
■..
Saves and creates al system data in the current station.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_050.15
nv Training for ` S TRAIN I ISI Automation and Industrial
Solutions
Save
You select the Station Save menu to save the current configuration in the current project (without generating system data blocks).
Save and Compile
When you select the Station - Save and Compile menu or click the icon in the toolbar, the configuration and parameter assignment data are also saved in system data blocks.
Consistency Check
You select the Station 4 Consistency Check menu to check whether it is possible to generate configuration data from the entries made.
Download in Module You select the PLC 4 Download menu or click the icon in the toolbar to download the selected configuration to the PLC. The PLC must be in "STOP" mode! System Data
The system data blocks (SDBs) are generated and modified when you configure the hardware and compile the hardware configuration. SDBs contain configuration data and module parameters. When a system data block is downloaded, it is stored in the CPU's work memory. This makes it easier to replace modules, because the parameter assignment data is downloaded to the new module from the system data blocks on startup. The PLC must be in "STOP" mode! In the programming device, the system data blocks are saved under: Project \ Station \ CPU \ S7_program \ Blocks \ System_data. You double-click the System data briefcase icon to see the list of system data blocks.
SITRAIN
Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 15
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
Uploading the Actual Configuration to the PG I II Manager /My Protect D:. /_Lourses My_Proie]
aj PM Olt Insert IPZ Wow Osten, Widow He
1o
I rr IP 1
El ( J My_Plogen SOteCee
Blocks
AccmRchts
vL
Download Configure...
Ctr CH-4-E
Which module do you want to reach?
Compile and Download Objects... Upload to PG
Rack
Copy RAM to ROM... Download User Program to Memory Ca,
Slot
Save to Memory Card.., Retrievefrom Memory Card-.
Target Station:
a
r
Manage M7 System...
Local Can be reached by means of gateway
Drive Display Accent* Nodes Change Module IdentficatIonCPU Messages... Display Force Values Montor/Modify Variables
Diagrestic/Seeke
Enter connection to target station: MPI address I Module type I Station name I Module name I Mark designation 2 CPU 315-... Accessible Nodes
INIM=1:21E1111
PROMO Edlt Diernet Assign PG/PC Camel PG/PC Asogriment Update Firmware
pleats the °pedalo System... Save Service Data... Up date
1.1 uploads the current station cafroureen to the creadan system (conflpealesn and wow,
Cancel
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Introduction
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.16
I Help I
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
A configuration is necessary only in the following cases: • if you want to modify the basic module settings • for stations with distributed I/O • for S7-400 with several CPUs or with expansion racks You can read out the actual configuration from the CPU and look at the set parameters in an existing system.
Actual Configuration During startup, the CPU generates an actual configuration. That is, the CPU saves the arrangement of the modules and allocates the addresses in accordance with a fixed algorithm. If no parameters have been assigned, the default parameters defined at the factory are used. The system stores this actual configuration in system data blocks. Uploading to PG/PC
There are two ways of uploading the actual configuration to the PG/PC: 1. In the SIMATIC Manager: select the PLC 4 Upload Station to PG... menu. 2. In the HW Config tool: select the PLC 4 Upload menu or click the icon.
Storage on PG/PC
The actual configuration read from the hardware is inserted as a new station in the selected project on the PG/PC.
Note
When you read out the actual configuration, the order numbers of the modules cannot be completely identified. For this reason, you should check the configuration. If required, insert the exact module type of the existing modules. To do so, choose the module, and then select the Options -> Specify Module menu.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 16
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Adapting the Setpoint Configuration a:HW Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project] Station Edt Insert PLC View Options Window He
0 2-, st.i dif I 1 Ral 1111 * el I IIL73 I 133981111111111111111111111•1 1 2 X2
9.111
PS 307 54 CPU 315-2 DP DP
4 5 6 7 R
fird
frolic
D1323d)C24V D032rDC24V/0.54 D18/D08x24V/0.5A Al2x129it
E E E SIMATIC 400 p-- SIMATIC HMI Station E 1111SIMATIC PC Based Control 300/400 E SIMATIC PC Station
71 4.141 (0) UR sia 1 2 ..1/4.." 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
i Module
PS 30754
B CPU 315-2 DP DP
D132)0C24V D032sDC24V/0.54 D18/D0EN24V/0.54 Al2x12130
I S tandem! PR OF1BUS DP PROFIBUS-PA PROFINET 10
a
Order number 6ES7 3074 EA00-06A0 6ES7 315-2AF03-0ABO
Rimers
M...
I ...
Q...
Comment ..
V1.1
2
/au
13ES 7 321-1BLOO-OAA0 6ES7 322-113L00416A0 6ES7 3231 BH00-06A0 6ES7 331.710301-N30
0...3 8
4...7 8 SIMATIC S7-300147-300 and C7 modules central rack) ml
Press Ft to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.17
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
Since different training units and CPUs are used for the courses, the CPU available has to be integrated into the setpoint configuration.
What to Do
1. Open the given HW Station with the HW-Config tool SIMATIC Manager (Offline view) -> select the HW-Station "S7 300 Station" 9 double-click on the "Hardware" object
2. Click on the icon (see left) to have the Hardware Catalog appear. 3. In the Hardware Catalog, select the CPU used in the training unit and bring it to Slot 2 using drag and drop. 5. Acknowledge the message "Do you want to exchange the component with the order number .......... for the component with the order number .......... 4. Also check all other modules.
6. Save and compile the configuration with the icon. 7. Download the modified hardware configuration into the CPU. 8. Exit the HW-Config tool.
SITRAIN
Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 17
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Assigning Parameters to the CPU Clock Memory and Testing It , =1Q.121
a:HW Conlin - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project] gation Edit Insert EEC View Qptions Window Help
51 I
D t: a II tll 01111IIMIN=11•111■
ms*
PS 307 50
2
r- CPU 315-2 DP DP
4 5 6 7
5 1 X ...„11
i
II DI32xDC24V II D032xDC24V/0.54 II D18./D08ex24V/0.5A II Al2x1213it
Timepl.Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts 1 Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I General I Startup Interrupts
Cycle Update OBI process image cyclically
Scan cycle monitoring time [ms1: Minimum scan cycle
50
-
Scan cycle bedlam communication [511
Fr
Size of the process image
11_1 11 2d E (0) UR
0885 call up at I/O access error:
Order number S7 307-1EA00-0AA0 6E S 7 315-2AF03-0ABO
Slot f Module
6ES 7 321-1 BL00-0440
5 6 7 8 9 10
D°:
D18.
Al2,
Arrangement of
EL tar - 49 tl
DI-1611
1
r Clock Memory 1.7 Clock memory Memory Byte:
4 Address
Symbol
10
1;
tables
Table Edit Insert PLC
I No 0B85 call up
,_1171. 12Si
Variable View Options Window Help
Iffiblel -I-I 11 F;J_I kl_?1 cY_F fe I Modify value'
Displa Status value
Cancel
I Help
•1
2
01111111111At.;.
My_Project SIMATIC 300(1)
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Task
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.18
iv
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Assign parameters to the CPU in such a way that the clock memory byte is available on memory byte MB 10. Then check the success of your parameter assignment with the "Monitor/Modify Variable" function.
What to Do:
1. Start the HW-Config tool SIMATIC Manager (Offline view) -> select the HW-Station "S7 300 Station" - double-click on the "Hardware" object 2. Parameterize the MB10 memory byte as the CPU clock memory byte HW Config - double-click on CPU 9 Cycle / Clock Memory 3. Save and compile the modified configuration Station 4 Save and Compile 4. Download the modified configuration into the CPU PLC 4 Download 5. Exit the HW Config tool 6. Use the function "Monitor/Modify Variable" to monitor the MB10 memory byte in the "binary" display format to be able to see the individual bits with the flashing frequencies In the SIMATIC Manager, select the CPU of the HW Station 4 PLC 4 Monitor/Modify Variable 4 enter MB 10 in the Variable Table address field 4 using a right mouse-click, set the display format to "binary" 4 activate the function using the Glasses icon
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 18
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Note
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.19
21 SITRAIN Training for
lir
Automation and Industrial Solutions
The following pages contain either further information or are for reference to complete a topic. For more indepth study we offer advanced courses and self-learning mediums.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 19
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
CPU Properties EL:11W Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) — My_Project] 011 Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Wildow Help
JCicirt-e CIE101111111111=r 1 1 PS 307 5A 2
Xl 3 4 5 6 7
N, 2x
1- CPU 31:2bi. I- DP
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time-of-Day Interrupts Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts I Short Description:
CPU 315-2 DP 64 KB work memory; 0.3 ms/1000 instructions; MP1+ DP connection (D pz-J master or DP slave); multi-tier configuration up to 32 modules, Send and Receive capability for lateral communication, constant bus cycle time, routing, firmware V1.1
Order No./ firmware
6ES7 315-2AF03-64130 / V1.1
Name:
ICPU 315-2 DP
r Interface
412141 ±. 1 (0) UR .
X?
_xj
I
DI32xDC24V D032x0C24V/0.5A DI8/D0EQ4V/0 54 412x1280
;1
Slot 1 2
I Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/S2)
Type:
MPI
Module PS 30754 CPU 315-2 DP DP
Order number 6E57 3071 EA004440
Address:
2
6ES7 315-2AF03-OADO
Networked:
Yes
DI32xDC24V D032xDC24V/0.54 I DI8/D08x24V/0.54 .412x1284
6ES7 321-1BLOO.OAAO 6E57 322-113L00-0AA0 6ES7 323-113H00-04A0 6ES7 331-7K801-0030
Comment:
Cancel
OK
Press Fl to get Help.
I Help /41
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.20
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Assigning Parameters
You assign parameters to the modules to adapt them to the requirements of the process.
What to do
1. Select a module in the station window. 2. Double-click the selected module to open the "Properties" dialog window. 3. This dialog window contains ten tabs in which you can assign parameters for the various CPU characteristics (see next pages).
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 20
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Startup Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/52)
I
Time-of-Day Interrupts Cyclic Interrupts 1 Diagnostics/Clock 1 Protection 1 Communication Startup General Cycle/Clock Memory 1 Retentive Memory 1 Interrupts 1 ▪
Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration
•
Reset outputs at hot restart
P
Disable hot restart by operator (for example, from PG) or communication job (for example, from MPI stations).
— Startup after Power On
H ot restart
a Warm restart
r Cold restart
—Monitoring Time for "Finished' message from modules [100 ms]
1650
Transfer of parameters to modules [100 ms]
1100
Hot restart [100 ms):
OK
I
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Startup Characteristics
Cancel
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.21
I Help
SITRAIN Training for Automation and industrial Solutions
The S7-300 and S7-400 CPUs have different startup characteristics. Only with CPUs with integrated DP interface (and S7-400) can you use the "Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" checkbox to decide whether the CPU should start up if the setpoint configuration is not the same as the actual configuration (number and type of modules installed). The other S7300 CPUs go into RUN when the setpoint configuration is not the same as the actual configuration.
Warm Restart
The S7-300 only recognizes the "Warm restart" startup. Newer S7-CPUs also recognize "Cold restart". All non-retentive addresses (PII, PIQ, non-retentive bit memories, timers, counters) are reset (overwritten by 0) and the cyclic program execution starts at the beginning.
Cold Restart
Cold restart behaves the same as Warm restart, except that ALL - even the retentive memory areas - are reset.
Hot Restart
All - even the non-retentive - memory areas retain their contents and program execution restarts where it stopped.
Monitoring Times
•
"Finished" message from modules (x100ms): Maximum time for all modules to issue a Finished message after power ON. If the modules do not send a Finished message to the CPU within this time, the actual configuration is not equal to the setpoint configuration.
•
Transfer of parameters to modules (x100ms): Maximum time for "distributing" the parameters to the parameterassignable modules (timing begins after "Finished message from modules"). If, after the monitoring time has run out, all modules have not been assigned parameters, then the actual configuration is not equal to the setpoint configuration.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 21
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Retentive Memory Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/52)
Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock 1 Protection Retentive Memory Cycle/Clock Memory I General I Startup
Communication Interrupts
Retentivity 16
Number of memory bytes starting with MBO: Number of S7 timers starting with TO: Number of S7 counters starting with CO: –Areas
DB No.
Byte Address
Number of Bytes
Retentive Area 1: [C7—
Retentive Area 2: Retentive Area 3:
Relevant only for CPUs until Oct. 2002 that have no backup battery
—
[7
rc7--
Retentive Area 4:
ib---
Retentive Area 5: R etentive Area 6: Retentive Area 7:
I7—
Retentive Memory
ra--Cancel
OK
SIMATIC S7
Io
FT
Retentive Area 8:
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. An rights reserved.
lU
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.22
lik;
Help
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
The "Retentive Memory" tab page is used for specifying the memory areas to be retained after a power failure or during the transition from STOP to RUN. A "warm restart" is performed in both cases on the S7-300.
Warm Restart with Backup Battery
On warm restart, tne blocks stored in the battery-backed RAM (OB, FC, FB, DB) as well as the bit memories, timers and counters defined as retentive are retained. Only the non-retentive bit memories, timers and counters are reset.
Warm Restart without Backup Battery
If the RAM is not battery-backed, the information in it is lost. Only the bit memories, timers and counters defined as retentive and the retentive data block areas are saved in the non-volatile RAM area. After a warm restart (without battery backup), the program must be downloaded again: • from the memory card (if inserted) or • from the PG/PC (if no memory card exists).
Note
SITRAIN
For CPUs delivered after Oct. 2002, a backup battery is no longer necessary. All retentive data is saved on the MMC card in case of a power failure.
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 22
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Protection
General
I
Startup
I
Cycle/Clock Memory
Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts Protection level
I
Interrupts
Protection I Communication
Process mode
I— Removable with password
•
Retentive Memory
Mode
6.1: Keyswitch setting
•
I
Diagnostics/Clock
Permissible cycle increase via test functions:
2: Write-protection 3: Write-/read protection
( Test mode
Password:
Enter again:
OK
I
SIMATIC S7
__:_l Car ocel
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008_ All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.23
Help
211 SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Default Setting
Default setting (protection level 1; no password assigned): The keyswitch position on the CPU determines the protection level: • Keyswitch in RUN-P or STOP position: no restrictions • Keyswitch in RUN position: read-only access possible!
Password
If a protection level was assigned with a password (only valid until a memory reset), a "person who knows the password" has reading and writing access. "The person who doesn't know the password" has the following restrictions: • protection level 1: corresponds to the default setting • protection level 2: read-only access possible, irregardless of the keyswitch setting • protection level 3: neither reading nor writing access possible, regardless of the keyswitch setting.
Characteristics of a Password-Protected Module in Operation Example: if you want to execute the "Modify Variable" function, you must enter the password for a module that has been assigned the protection level 2 parameter. Access Rights
Mode
SITRAIN
You can also enter the password for a protected module in the SIMATIC Manager: 1. Select the protected module or its S7 program 2. Enter the password when you select the PLC Access Rights menu. The access rights, after a password has been entered, is only valid until the last S7 application is completed. The cycle load for test functions depends on which of the following modes you select. In Process Mode, test functions such as "Monitor" or "Monitor/Modify Variable" are restricted so that the allowable scan cycle time that has been set can not be exceeded. Testing with breakpoints and single-step (program execution) cannot be performed. In Test Mode, all test functions through the PG/PC can be used without restrictions, even if the scan cycle time is greatly increased.
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 23
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Diagnostics/Clock Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/52)
General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication I Time-of-Day Interrupts ICyclic Interrupts — System Diagnostics
r Extended functions 17
Report caused STOP
r Acknowledgment-triggered reporting of SFB33-35 Clock Synchterization
Time Interval
Synchronization Type
In the PLC:
INone
J
INone
2, j
On MPI:
INone
1 . 1
INone
1-1
On MFI:
I l one
LI
INone
—II
Correction factor:
OK
ID
ms
Cancel
I
I
Help
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
System Diagnostics
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.24
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
If the "Report cause of STOP" checkbox is deactivated (not checked), no message is sent to the PG/PC or OP when the CPU goes into Stop mode ("CPU Messages"). The cause of the stop is still entered in the diagnostic buffer.
Clock
With networked stations, it is possible to synchronize clocks. Thus, for example, a WinCC flexible station can synchronize all remote S7 stations to its own time of day in a selectable time interval. It is, however, also possible to automatically reset the clock by a specific correction value in stand-alone devices.
Correction Factor
The correction factor compensates for a loss or gain in the clock time within a 24 hour period. Positive or negative millisecond values can be specified.
Example:
If the clock is 3 seconds fast after 24 hours, this inaccuracy can be corrected with the "-3000ms" factor.
Note
The "Interrupts", "Time-Of-Day Interrupts" and "Cyclic Interrupt" tabs are discussed in the "Organization Blocks" chapter.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 24
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Communication Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/52) General
I
Startup
I
Cycle/Clock Memory
I
Retentive Memory
Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock I Protection
I Interrupts I Communication
Connection Resources Reserved for PG Communication: OP Communication: S7 Basic Communication: S7 Communication:
0
Maximum number of connection resources:
12
OK
I
SIMATIC S7 Communication
Cancel
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
(already configured)
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.25
I Help
17-
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Every communication connection occupies a connection resource on the S7CPU. Depending on the technical specifications, a specific number of possible connection resources are available to every S7 - CPU which are occupied by various communication services (PG/OP communication, S7 communication or S7 standard communication). When communication services log on, the connection resources are occupied in the sequence of the log on. So that the occupation of these resources is not dependent only on the sequence of the log on of the various communication services, you can also reserve communication resources for the following services: •
PG communication
•
OP communication
•
S7 standard communication
At least one connection resource each is reserved for the PG/PC and OP communication. Smaller values are not possible. Other communication services, such as S7 Communication with PUT/GET functions, cannot occupy these connection resources even if the services make their connection first. Instead, still available connection resources are occupied that were not specifically reserved for a service.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 25
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
-
SIEMENS
Further Processing of Hardware Stations in the CA01 Electronic Catalog
Export function
Import function
[Hardware
S7 Hardware
CA01 Electronic Catalog
Station
Order lists E-mail dispatch Further processing with text editors
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.26
,1 SITRAIN Training for
41
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Importing and Exporting a Configuration
Introduction
As of STEP 7 V5, it is possible to handle station configurations not only together with the entire project (such as, save or open), but also to resave them independent of the project in a text file (ASCII file).
Applications
-
can be distributed through electronic media (such as e-mail) configuration of order data in the electronic catalog CA01 (Export)
-
generation of hardware configuration data from the CA01 (Import)
-
can be read into future STEP 7 versions the Export file can be printed out with text processor systems or can be further processed for documentation purposes
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 26
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
Exporting a Hardware Station aa7HW Config - [S7_300_Station (Configuration) — SERVI_S[ Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Windo Ctrl+N Ctrl+O
7
Open ONLINE
Help op iv?
111111111111111111111111
ii
Close Save Save and Compile
5 6 78
—
9 1--
Ctr1+5
PROF'S USl1 ) DP master system [I )
T tams
Properties... Import...
Export... Consistency Check
Ctrl+Alt44( Ctrl+Alt+F
Check OP. Coop t.b
Ctrl+P
Export Fie:
Print Preview... Page Setup...
Browse
D: \ S7_Courses S7_300_Station.cfg
I SERVI_S‘S7_300_Stetion 2 My_Project‘SIMATIC 300(1)
Options
3 LueftunglnitialsierungL57_300_Station
r Export default values
4 My_ProjectLS7_300_Station Exit
Alt+F4
10 11
I✓ Export symbols I7 Export subnets
Format
(7 Readable r Compact
12 Exports an extstng station.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Exporting
Cancel
Save
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.27
Help
I
SITRAIN Training for gir
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Open a station configuration or save the just edited station configuration (Menu option Station 9 Save). With the station configuration open, select the menu option Station 9 Export. In the dialog box that then appears, enter the path and the name of the Export File, the format and other options. Acknowledge the settings with "Save".
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 27
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
CA01: Selection Assistant for SIMATIC
ASST
Offline Mall
SILIUMERIK 8 SIMODRIVE
Fid
aroTirne PCS7
nrk
apHonfigurator tAhn-SPSOST ART
Extended search
Tree search
SNIATIC
ABC Industual Automation Systems - PLC
Interactive Catalog Siemens Automation and Driv
Lt....? Drive Technology SIMATIC cord' oilers 11,1[2i Automation Systems From the corrnact mini controller including the high-pe gr SIMATIC Industrial Automation Systems meet every demarn and every requirement, whatever I 1 Ela.,,k[i! PLC I I EI:Ky Distributed I/0s SIMATIC selection assistant - Project Manager Programming Devices II I [a}-f SIMATIC Industrial soh, File Edt Paste View Settings ? Micro Automation Sets Pa-14) Comment based Autor INts1 T IA-Programmer 1
SIMATIC selection assistant - Project [ File Edit
Paste
Import ...
View
Settings
x
File Name:
C:1abc
let
Archiv_11_2003.cs Archiv_4_2004. cry ARCHNI_BM_MELI ARCHIV_KURVENi ARCHIV_SM_MELI ARCHIV_System0. c chwinto.bd shier& ET.te IM000047.JPG K7 Antrieb PC FW
I
[A12411E1
Folder:
Properties
?
Selection assistant STEP 7
bc
~' a
_j I 0 S_U• koordinator
54
te:r .ritation cra
Project
test_20_05_2003 02:1
c PANTZON
Project Na: Ecited front Deatect
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Selection Assistant
Michael Jantzon
1
11 ,
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.28
Changed:
`
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
With the SIMATIC selection assistant, you can make the necessary preparations for importing a STEP7 hardware configuration file (.cfg). •
Specifying a project name and defining project properties
•
Selecting the appropriate configuration file
•
Using the import function
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 28
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
Parts List and Description
,JoI2_cf
SIMATIC selection assistant - Project Manager
Fte Eck Paste View Settings ?
_m11;7 4111
Einks4,4_u2 gifil TA-Programmer 1
Properties
ISM
Order number 6ES7307-1EA00-06A0 6ES7321-18L00-04A0 6ES7322-1BL00-O8A0 SES 7390-1AE804.1AA0 6ES 7392-14100-130.13
Pads list
A Descript
System
Designation List price Quantity Total price Load power supply PS 307; AC 120/23N, DC 1 upon request upon request Digital input SM 321, isolated, 32 DI, DC 24V 1 upon request upon request Digital output 32D0, DC 24V, 0.5A; isolated 1 upon request upon request 480 ram rag (*ogle mod width 40 mm) 1 uron request upon request Front connector, 40-pole, with screw contact 2 upon request upon request Total price:
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Parts List
SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_05E.29
upon request
SITRAIN Training for Illtr
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Using the CA01 Catalog CD and the various register tabs, you can get information about module component lists, pricing etc.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 29
ST-SERV1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
Symbolic Addressing W:Symbol Editor - [S7 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project \SIMATIC 3000Y\
yrnbol Table Edit Insert Mew Options Window Help
far, IA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
1 &
1 4 ith 1ft I ..--) c-, I lAi Symbols
Status I Symbol / L_Weight_hvalid 1 L_SYSTEM 1 L_MAN L_AUTO L_Restart man L_Resteart_aut L_Conv_Faut L_Faull1 L_Faut2 L_Faut3 L_S4_1411 L_S5_3,-LB L_S6_Final_Check L_Bsy1 L_Bay2 L_Bay3 L_Bay-LB K_Conv_RIGHT H_Conv_LEFT Horn QB_Simulator-LED QW_DigDisp Cl1N_Control 141420 QW_Setp_141420 DEI_Instance_FB20_F... DB_Instance_FB20_F... DB_FB11_RurningLight DB_F1317_Fault
Address Q 4.0 0 4.1 Q 42 0 43 0 4S 0 4.6 0 5.0 0 5.1 Q 52 0 53 0 5.4 0 5.5 0 5.6 0 8.1 0 82 0 83 0 8.4
I Dab:trim BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL 13001. BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL 13001 BOOL BOOL
0 8.6 0 8.7 OB 5 GAM 6 GAM 42
8001 BOOL BYTE WORD WORD WORD FB 20 FB 20 FI3 11 FB 17
0 es
ON 44
DB 0f3 DB DB
2 3 11 17
eax
SIMATIC S7
r:']
.....s..9 1 k? I Comment Indicator light - weigN invalid Indicator light System ON Indicator fight MAN mode bcficator light Automatic mode Indicator light for manual wean rested Indicator fight for automatic warm rested Imitator fight Conveyor fault Indicator light Fault 1 Indicator igN Fault 2 Indicator Nil Fault 3 Indicate. fight Wing at Bay 3 Indicator light Transport Bay 3 -> Light barrier bay Indcator fight Fnal check at LB bay Indeater fight Bay 1 Indcator light Bay 2 Indicator light Bay 3 Indicator tit Light barrier bay Run conveyer RIGHT Run conveyor LEFT Horn lower Simulator LEDs BCD cigltal display Control word for 144420 Setpoint speed for 144420 Instance DB for F1320, Evaluation of Fault 2 Instance DB for F1320, Evaluation of Fat 3 Instance DB for FBIl_RtrningLight Instance DB for F1317 Faut evahation
Press F1 to get Help
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
.•
1----
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.1
I— I
•1,
—
.1
4 lir
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents
Page ........................................................................................................... Objectives 2 Absolute and Symbolic Addressing 3 Symbolic Addressing 4 The Symbol Table 5 Edit: Find and Replace 6 View: Filter 7 View: Sort 8 ......... 9 Editing Symbols in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor Symbol Information in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor ....... 10 Symbol Selection in LAD/FBD ....... 11 Symbol Table: Export ....... 12 13 Symbol Table: Import ....... 14 Exercise 1: Creating a Symbol Table for the Conveyor Model
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 1
ST-SERV1 Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... know the difference between absolute and symbolic addressing know the difference between local and global symbols know the difference betweeen leading symbols and leading absolute addresses be able to edit a global symbol table be able to use the Block Editor to edit global symbols
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.2
Page 2
ll SITRAIN Training for
gi
Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Absolute and Symbolic Addressing Absolute Representation
A
Symbolic Representation
10.0
A
"SYSTEM_ON"
Q8.0 A
"LED ON"
10.4
A
"M_FORW"
Q20.5 Call
"MOTOR_FOR"
FC18
Call
"COUNT"
Symbol
Address
Data Type
Comment
MOTOR_FOR
Q20.5
BOOL
Motor moves forward
COUNT
FC18
FC18
Count bottles
SYSTEM_ON
10.0
BOOL
Switch system on
SYSTEM_ON
Q8.0
BOOL
Indicator: System is "On"
M_FORW
10.4
BOOL
Pushbutton: Motor forward
(max. 24 characters)
SIMATIC S7
(max. 80 characters)
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.3
‘tiT
.61
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Absolute Addressing
In absolute addressing, you specify the address (such as input I 1.0) directly. In this case you don't need a symbol table, but the program is harder to read.
Symbolic Addressing
In symbolic addressing, you use symbols (such as MOTOR_ON) instead of the absolute addresses. You store the symbols for inputs, outputs, timers, counters, bit memories and blocks in the symbol table.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 3
ST-SERV1 Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Symbolic Addressing Where are symbols used?
Where are they stored?
Global Data: - Inputs - Outputs - Bit mem., timers, counters - Peripheral I/O
Symbol Table
Symbol Editor
Local Block Data: - Block parameters - local / temporary data
Declaration part of the block
Program Editor
Jump Labels
Code section of the block
Program Editor
Block Names: - OB - FB - FC - DB - VAT - UDT
Symbol Table
Symbol Editor
DB Components
Declaration part of the DB
Program Editor
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
With what are they created?
18.09.2009 SERV1_06EA
1 ‘ 4r
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Global Symbols
Global symbols are declared in the symbol table and can be used in all blocks of a program. The name in the symbol table must be unique, that is, a symbolic name must appear only once in the table.
Local Symbols
Local symbols are declared in the declaration part of a block. They can be used only within that block. The same symbolic name can be used again in the declaration part of another block.
Notes
The LAD/STL/FBD Editor always displays symbols declared in the global symbol table in quotation marks. Local address symbols (local variables and parameters) are always displayed with a # (hash or pound mark) in front of them. You don't have to include the quotation marks or the hash mark when you enter symbolic addresses. The program editor automatically adds these for you.
Abbreviations
-
SITRAIN Training for
OB
Organization blocks (administration blocks)
FC
Functions (are used for program structuring)
FB DB
Function blocks (instantiation) Data blocks (store process data in the S7)
-
VAT Variable tables (monitoring instrument for process variables)
-
UDT User-defined data types (data type defined by the user)
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 4
ST-SERV1 Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
The Symbol Table MyProtect -- D: \Courses \MyProject MyPioject
E
0111 S7_300_Station
_DJ
1 12
Sources
Blocks
yi
CPU 315-2 DP S7ptogram E al Sources Blocks E i MICROMASTER_420 2 Touchpanel E
II ,.1.g125.1
-a,Symbol Editor - (57program (Symbols) — MyProject 57_300 Station\
2_cl
Symbol Table Edit Insert View motions Window
irakia a
y,
Statu Swift( 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
OB WartnRestart L_SYSTEM L MAN L_AUTO L_Restart_man L_Restart_aut L_Conv_Faut X
L_Faut2 L_Fault3 = L_E■avl 61 L_Bay2 = L_Bayl 62 63 L_Bay-LB 84 K Cony RIGHT Press F1 to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
I WI
Symbols Address ' 013 100 Q 4.1 0 4.2 0 4.3 0 4.5 0 4.6 0 5.0 0 5.1 0 52 0 5.3 0 8.1 0 82 0 6.3 0 8.4 0 8.5
18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.5
Data type 013 100 BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL. BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL BOOL
eoo1
Comment Warm restart OB Indicator tight System ON hclicetor ION MAN mode Include( nigh/ Automatic nada Indicator tight for mental warm restart Indicator NM for aulanath wean restart Indicator light Conveyor fault Indicator light Fault 1 Indicator WI Faut 2 Indicator Ugh Fault 3 Indicator NM Bay 1 Indicator light Bay 2 Indicator NM Bay 3 Indicator ight Light barrier bay Run conveyor RIGHT --
r
gee
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Opening the Symbol Table
Every "S7 program" has its own symbol table. You can open a symbol table from the SIMATIC Manager, among other ways, with a double-click on the "Symbols" icon. You can also open the symbol table from the LAD/STL/FBD Editor using the Options - Symbol Table menu option.
Table Structure
In the symbol table, a line is created for every variable. You then enter the symbol name, the address, the data type and a comment for the variable in the columns. A blank line is automatically added at the end of the table for defining a new symbol.
"Status" Column
Invalid symbol definitions are marked as follows in this column: = The symbol name or address is identical to another entry in the symbol table. X The symbol is incomplete (the symbol name and/or the address is missing).
Note
SITRAIN Training for
As soon as a symbol table has been created, the declared symbols are also available in all other tools (such as LAD/STL/FBD Editor, HW-Config, and Monitor/Modify Variables etc.).
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 5
ST-SERV1 Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Edit: Find and Replace Symbol Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project\SIMATIC 300(1)\CPU 315-2 DP] He
a Symbol Table IEdit Insert View Options Window CtrI+27 Ctri-i-Y
Undo
r cell
Status 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62
Cut Copy Pa5te
Ctrl+X Ctrl+C
Delete
Del
Select Undo Selection
•
We type 001 001 001 OOL 001 001
OOL
Comment Momertary contact System ON Momentary collect System OFF (NC collect) Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact Jog conveyor LEFT, momertary collect Swtch - Operating Mode Preselect '0. Momertery contact, confirm operating mode 0 • Display quality, 1 - Display weight Momentary collect to acknowledge warm restart display
41AMJAL,
IP• Go To Row... Add Defauk Symbols kener ate ',DE; Special Object Properties _otty.D T_Bay-LB BAY1 BAY2 BAY3 IN PNThcanbw PA( AN_State_MM420
Ctr1+%Al Ctrl-FE
Oa_
OOL
OOL
001 8.4 8S 8.6 8.7 2 42
COL LiOOL BOOL BOOL BOX BOOL WORD WORD
r Suchberei:h r Von Cursorposition thwarts
SIMATIC S7
Von Cursorposition aufwarts
Guard
r Markiltung
Opbonen
ma Widcards suchen
r GroB/Kleinschrerbung beachtan
Suchen I
Date: File:
r
2.1 «Reduziert I
r Nu genes Wort suchen
Looks for text or replaces text in the arrant symbol table.
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Ersetzen dick 1A4.
Suchen neck
IA8.
18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.6
Erseten
I Ale ersetzen 1
Schis8en 1
Hie
_.111 SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Find and Replace
A number of options are available for finding and replacing text in the current window: • Find what: Enter the text you are looking for. • Replace with: Enter the replacement text. • From cursor down: Searches downwards to the last line in the symbol table. • From cursor up: Searches upwards to the first line in the symbol table. • Match case: Only searches for the specified text with identical use of uppercase and lowercase letters. • Find whole words only: Searches for the specified text as a separate word, not as part of a longer word. • All: Searches through the whole symbol table, starting from the cursor position. • Selection: Searches only the selected symbol lines.
Note
When looking for addresses, you must insert a wildcard after the address identifier (? for one character, * for several characters), otherwise the address cannot be found. For find and replace: for example, replace all outputs that have address 8. with address 4.:
Example:
Find what: Replace with: Q 8. Q 4.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 6
ST-SERV1 Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
View: Filter 11711 J
'Symbol Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Prolort SIMAT C 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DPP Sleet I Hew Options Meow He
Et, Symbol rode Eck
jranaleslxike Stem 119 120 1 21 122 123 124
Zoom In
CITH-Nurn-r
Zoom Out
CP1+Num-
-
Zoom Factor...
I Del
11111111111■1111111111fiffar-
Ce foe Maw Ccrumns 11, 0, M, C, CC 071+K restart 013 -Pali far Tooear or-Pcri for 5C to 8w or Iptt - we upd.t. or Pare Sysl PS or Isrt MAP L_AUTO 0 43 BOOL Incbcdce lett Auk L_Reatakman 0 4.5 Indicator ept to r 1300L L_Realart_aut 0 46 1930L becalm 1)1 to e L_Corn_Fati 0 5.0 DOM tectica VI Cm L_Fautl 0 5.1 BOO. Indloalor Ipla Fad L _Fault2 0 52 BOX Indicator Ibb Fad L_Fau1.3 0 5.3 SCOL Indicator NMI Feel L S466 0 5.4 00C4. Irdicator iptt Is L_S5_3-Ple 0 SS 13COL Ineacetor fpM Trar L_S6fInal_Cheick DOM 5.5 Indicator qt Fria L_Bayl 0 6004 Indicator aget Bay . Symbol Editor - [57 Prograrn(2) (Symbols) — My_Project S1MATIC
125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146
SYmb01 OB_Cycle OES_Cycky 081_110_FLT1 OB SlareFei 013 WarrnRe p%' An MNAl2 LWargrtirn L_SYSTEM L_MAN
a
Insert
Symbol Table Edit
rai:
61
a
Status
Vow
Et) f'
-
Symbol
Window Help
I r Flared yew
1 Mesas I 8.0 81 I 82 0 8.3 II 8.4 I 8.5 1 86 I 8.7
LB
Fiters the 3
Options
TSayl T_Bay2 T_Bey-LB BAY1 BAY2 BAY3
I OM* Woe I BOOL 5)00(. BOOL 8001 BOOL 0001. DOOL 8001
,
2:1
-Fier List Na:
Filter name:
J
lAll Symbols
(Selection in the Symbol Table with Alt+0, ..,Alt+9) Dela, cs
New filter — Display Symbol with Property... Name. Address:
1 18
Data Type: Comment .
.2j '
_LI .:_1 .:d
Monitoring:
I'
Op. Ctrl. + Monitoring:
I'
Message:
_II
z_l
I' I'
Communication: Control at contact:
_II
F—E
Display Symbol with Status... I Valid
lInvalid (non-unique, incomplete)
I Cannon WI Pm
Fifer
Cancel
I
Help
momectarreirmeroprourrierm-Proxbray wary Bay 1 Proyirdy mace Bay 2 Probriy sinew lbw 3
Mamba of symbols: 61172
L
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
View: Filter
I
hlorneria
18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.7
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Only the symbols which meet the active filter criteria ("symbol properties") are displayed in the current window. You can apply several criteria at once. The following filter criteria can be linked with one another: Name, Address, Data Type, Comment, Operator Control & Monitoring, Communication, Message. Permissible wildcards are ? for one character and * for several characters.
Examples
•
Name: M* Only the names that begin with "M" and that contain any number of additional characters are displayed in the symbol table.
•
Name: SENSOR_? Only the names that begin with "SENSOR_" and that contain one other character are displayed in the symbol table.
•
Address: 1*.* Only the inputs are displayed.
•
SITRAIN
Valid, Invalid The symbols must be unique, that is, a symbol or an address must exist only once in the symbol table. If a symbol or an address appears more than once, the lines in which it appears are displayed in "Bold". If your symbol table is long, and you want to find such ambiguous symbols or addresses more quickly, you can display only these lines of the symbol table by Filter and the attribute "Invalid". selecting the menu option View
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 7
ST-SERV1 Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
View: Sort v a5ymbol Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project \SIN1ATIL 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DP]
.1.2J25.1
a Symbol Tat* Edit Insertr h rool Options Wridow Help
car, 61 ! 37
IX
gla 3 la zocf"^
ZOOM Out Zoom Factor...
Status I Symbol
FC_MM420
38
.FC_Sequenc
39 40
FC_Cornrnark I FC_Scale
T_System_O Columns R, 0, 14, C, CC Ctrl+K
42 43 44
T_System_O T _Jou RION' T_Jog_LEFT
45
S_WA_Mode upd,t,
46 47 48 49
T_M/A_Acc S_VVeight/Quantity
50
emery contact Syste emery contact Syste 'F (NC contact) VI collect conveyor R101-17;r: y coiled -conveyor LEFT,
v. 1.Mbar
Status Bar
I I
I
LB
I I I
T_Bay1
I
T_Elay2
I
T_Bey3 T_Bay-LB
I
BAY1
I
I
0.6 13001BOOL 0.7 1.0 BOOL 1.1 BOOL 1.2 BOOL 13 BOOL 8D BOOL 8.1 BOOL 8.2 BOOL 8.3 BOOL 8.4 BOOT BOOL 8.5
I 8.8 BOOL BAY2 I 8.7 BOOL BAYS 60 Sorts the display according to specific criteria.
SIMATIC S7
Display quell
Momentary contact
Column:
Simulate Fault 3, Os Light earner Momentary contact Momentary contact Momentary coded
Address Ascending Address 4..c.Pndina Address Descending Data Type Ascending Data Type Descending Comment Asc
Momentary coiled Simulate Foul 1, 0. Simulate Fault 2,
OK
Help
Cancel
Momentary contact Light barrier bay Proximity sensor Bey 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Proximity sensor Bev 3
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
J
ch - Operathg Sort ary collect
FS
I
T_Ackn_WarrnRestarl T_Ackn Fault S_Faut1 S_FauL2 SFaul3
Sort
merit ontrol MM420
.equencer for production fne
41
51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
wl
Ctrl+Num+ Ctrl+Nurn-
18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.8
r--r---1
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industnal Solutions
The entries in the symbol table can be displayed in alphabetical order. You use the View - Sort menu option to specify the column to be used as the point of reference for sorting in the current window. There is an alternative way to sort: 1. Click the column heading "Symbol, Address, Data type or Comment" for sorting in ascending order in this column. Answer "Yes" when prompted. 2. Click the column heading once more for sorting in descending order in this column. Answer "Yes" when prompted.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 8
ST-SERV1 Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Editing Symbols in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor
...L412.Jc JJJ j
LAD/STL/FEID - [FICI My_Project SIMATIC 300(1) CPU 315-2 DP]
CI.
File Edit Insert PLC Debug
❑4,-1=-1®1 FC1
View Options Window Help
I IeIfdL-LI E ICI F 9.1 I LLI Firt
-IFI*1-011141-4-fl
JJi
System
g...1 New network
System ON/OFF
T_Syst es_ in= Cut ON SR Copy
Ctri+X
Paste
CIAO
Delete
Del
0
II
•r_Systak_ On • VI
E yr Bit logic E Comparator Si Converter E Counter DB cal E E Jumps 111 mInteger function Floating-point fct. E E Move fiA Prooram control
E -a
Ctrl+C
Insert Network
Ctrl+R
Insert Empty Box
Silt+F9 Cir1+3
Insert Symbol Go To Edit Symbols...
Alt+Return
Special Object Prq
ties
— It Program e...
TI1141 4 11 ■1
6: Magna:bar Address
Shows properti
Add to Sytobott
I Symbol L SYSTEM
i
I
Cal struc...
7: Compaiis
Dees type I Cabbed BOOL INclocelor light System ON Sorting
Delete Symbol
I
1 Ditpley Columns R, 0. M, C, CC The symbols an welted eali, DE a 'Apply'
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Edit Symbols
18.09.2009 SERV1_06E.9
l v.
ik
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
With the menu option Edit 9 Symbols..., or a right mouse-click on the address followed by the menu option Edit Symbols..., you can also assign symbolic names to absolute addresses at a later point in time. These assigned names are automatically entered into the symbol table. If you assign a name that is already in the symbol table, it will be displayed in a different color. Duplicate names cannot be used in the symbol table.
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 9
ST-SERV1 Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Symbol Information in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor AD STL ,FEID [Fri -- My_Project .5114/1511 300(1 )\CPU 315-2 DP]
—12.1a1
Cl• Fie Eat Insert PLC Debug new Options Widow Hew,
klitALM . 11111 .
DIr312-11:111
LI22.1 Eft
'di
AD . STI IAD - [Ell -- My_Project.5114ATIC MOW
.
T_System_ ON.
I I
:'
ON/OFF
.
1,ATSTIM
S
,14.1251
c. Ian Dia...I:Ho Lie xiikiel LLI L.1 2 -11-1*1-01E11.1-r1 3-1 LI ? 7C1
SA
------
CP11315-2Fin'
(a Fie 644 Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help
System
mem System
1
ciAji ra.
System
=13E: System ON/OFF
8
71S ystem_ OFF.
I0.0 Momentary contact System ON
10.1 iT System OFF / Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact)]
"T_Systes_ ON"
Symbol imbesmstiam: T_System_ON T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM
I
-- Momentary contact Sy Momentary contact Sy -- Indicator light Syst
10.0 10.1 04.1
04.1
Indicator light System ON . L_SYSTIM. SR
00.1 Momentary contact System OFF INC
contact)
.
TSystaa_ OFF'
A
1 - --
1
1 11
14
DIM WHEW
2 Into
a Croesreimences
Addlets 14o 0 loffIne
Press Fl to get Help.
1/1
NI 11
4
1313 1111iLIM
Info
Commelemnom
Arktess via
rx
Press F1 to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Addressing
18.09.2009 SERV106E.10
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
In the LAD/STL/FBD Editor you can choose to display the addresses in one of the following two ways when you select the View - Display with - Symbolic Representation menu option: •
Symbolic Addressing or
•
Absolute Addressing.
You can display the symbolic and absolute address assignments used in the network along with their comments by selecting the View 9 Display with 9 Symbol Information menu option. The assignments are found under the network in LAD/FBD and in STL they are found in the statement line. Symbol Information
In the LAD/STL/FBD Editor settings you can select whether the symbol information for the addresses is to be displayed directly at the address (see right picture) or at the lower edge of the network (see left picture).
Note
If you position the mouse pointer on an address, a "Tooltip" appears with the symbol information for this address.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 10
ST-SERV1
Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Symbol Selection in LAD/FBD AD 571
-
1 • "FE
-- 5E1011
573(105[allon',CPt) 315-2 Din,-\ FC14]
0 He Edit Insert PLC Debug Yew Options
❑I2;11HWsJAliasj rial Lk*
r: 1
0014 Title,
=gm Indicator light 8.ty 1 1C Cons_ UMW
.
•1_41710 .
"BAT1`
VtVI
L_AUTO .
"UTZ"
.
•13.5Y2.
•M tanv Fault•
•L_Bay-12 .
Vi
1.11.•
•L_Bayl.•
VI
Fault'
•L_Bay-LB .
Cony RICKY .
K
lash_218 . N_Ans_Leh BOOL N_Aux_Nan_ON BOOL Network 2: Indicator ligt Njur_Systam_011 BOOL M_Bayl_occup BOOL . R_Cono_ N_Bey2_ocony POOL .1_1070. RIM" 1_Bay3_occup BOOL I VIN_Bays_occup_1242 BOOL 111_Cono_Yoult BOOL .8171° N_Cono_Yoult_INCE BOOL N_Cono_Jog_11... BOOL POOL IIN_Edge_Aux POOL .1_1=0° RIGS(' kiault1 BOOL H— IIN_Youle2 3001 f----I BOOL Network B: Title: Initiallgtete BOOL 11_3og_LIIT 3001 Cono_ lain_Jeg_BICHT BOOL sremro• 16114_11/1_Acc•pt_BNI BOOL Nissing or incorrect. Bit itM_N/A_ModeSel... BOOL
r1
Mery cc inconectki eddies,
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
Aux. mg Edge e. Edge at Mowry Memory Memory m11 Bory Memory Neaory mono,. Memory Ausi11] Memory peso, Memory
4 21
101.1 16.3 16.2 30.5 30.4
Memory Memory Mowry Mowry timnoryyj ■ eess internal fault "BAF" -> battery fault "BATT1F"-> Battery 1 empty or missing "BATT2F"-> Battery 2 empty or missing "DC 5V" -> 5 V OK "DC 24V"-> 24 V OK "FMR" Acknowl. switch (Fault Message Reset) On/Off switch (Standby) Battery compartment
I
Selection switch for battery monitoring I "BATT INDIC" "VOLTAGE" selector
U. r-
> —
3-pin power connection
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.7
21 SITRAIN Training for
A
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Power Supply
The power supply (PS) supplies the internal 5V voltage for the modules. Automatic adjustment is made for line frequencies from 48 to 64 Hz.
LED "INTF"
Lights up in the event of internal faults, such as • Short circuit or overload at 5V/24V • Standby switch on "0" and impermissible external supply • Battery fault
LED "BAF"
Battery fault. Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low. Example: No batteries present or battery failure and there is no external power supply available.
LED "BATT1F/ BATT2F"
Lights up in the case of battery reversal, if no battery is present, or the battery is half discharged. The BATT.INDIC switch for battery monitoring is set to the 1BATT position (for one battery), the 2BATT position (for 2 batteries) or OFF (no battery monitoring).
LED "DC 5V/DC 24V" Is lit when the 5V/24V DC output voltage is within the tolerance limits and flashes to indicate voltage recovery after a short circuit or overload. "FMR" Ackn.Switch
Acknowledgement switch for acknowledging and resetting a fault message when the fault has been eliminated.
ON/OFF Switch (Standby)
Switches the output voltage (5/24 VDC) to OV and switches off the LEDs by interrupting the control current circuit. (The power supply is then in standby mode because the primary line voltage cannot be switched off.)
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 7
ST-SERV1 HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
LEDs on the S7-400 CPU
INTF 71
CPU with one interface SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved
CPU with two interfaces 18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.8
SITRAIN
f or
Fault LEDs
CPUs have fault LEDs that provide first information about an occurred error or that give the CPU status:
LED "INTF"
Indicates an internal fault (error in the user program ).
LED "EXTF"
Indicates an external fault (fault in an I/O module).
LED "BUS1F"
Indicates a bus fault of the MPI/DP interface.
LED "BUS2F"
Indicates a bus fault of the DP interface.
LED "FRCE"
Indicates that inputs/outputs are forced.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 8
ST-SERV1 HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Performing a Memory Reset and a Warm Restart RUN-P RUN
RUN
1. Set the mode selector switch to STOP
STOP MRES*
STOP st!' MRES RUN-P RUN STOP CV MRES
2. Hold (Press) the mode selector switch in the MRES position until the STOP LED has flashed twice slowly. Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to the STOP position.
Y
RUN-P RUN STOP CI) MRES
RUN STOP MRES
within 1 sec
25.Turn (Press) the mode selector switch to the MRES position once more until the STOP LED begins to flash quickly. Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to the STOP position.
;. RUN ;
.STOP MRES
RUN-P RUN STOP _11.„,)
RUN
3. Set the mode selector switch to the RUN-P (RUN) position ! (A warm restart is carried out in the transition from STOP to RUN/RUN-P)
STOP MRES ,
MRES/III
SIMATIC S7
Date: File
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Memory Reset
Warm Restart
SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_07E.9
SITRAIN Or
Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
When a memory reset is performed on an S7 CPU, the following happens: •
all CPU user data as well as the entire load and work memory are cleared
•
the CPU interrupts all connections to other communications partners
•
the CPU parameters and all modules are set to default values
•
in the case that a memory card is used, the CPU copies the relevant portion of the stored program needed for execution into the internal RAM
During a warm restart, the process images and the non-retentive data are deleted. Then the cyclic program execution begins by reading in the process image input tables (PII).
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 9
ST-SERV1 HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Calling the "Monitor/Modify Variable" Tool VSIMATIC Manager - [SERV I _S — IM57_Courses".SER V I _L]
a Fie D
Edit Insert j PLC View Options
la- 11? at
SERV1 S El II S7:300_Sta CPU 31! El Ch1:
window
Access Rights
I AD 5T1 I BD if C lb
Download
arkt.
Configure...
Ctrl+K
Compile and Download Objects...
g TP17013 Col Et,3 Ch08_8
26J JJJ
on,lotor" - - stavi_s.si_soo_stationNcets
DIct12-11:11 & a.16el !clr!I I Es46bhCemealenteCo141eursdCP11 D'""*.d
Up'osd to PG Upload Station to PG...
MICROI.
1
.
O Pee Ed, 1,24.L I PLC Debug New Options wad. Heb
g innertane a re
Copy RAM to ROM.., Download User Program to Memory Card
DepleParceNkos
Q. our
Save to Memory Card...
7016 7101o:
Kap09_binar Retrieve from Memory Card... Kep10_dcite Manage P17 System... Kap12,Rew Efl El a Kap13_MM4 Drive IE
V
Display Accessble Nodes Change Module Identification..,
M.E
CPU Messages...
Disignosbc/Setting
r
. 2: Jog Conveyor LIFT
181 -ji IIAIJIMIN 1: Ewa A 2 1rdo
Display Force Values
etenT• ( )—I
Ciodo
A 4:Meats We
A a Madly A & !Novae c .4.12J2-i
IS Table Ede Wert PLC
PROFIBUS Edit Ethernet Node...
Variable
Cancel PG/PC Assignment
2
DIGAUI X Address' Symbol 83 I_Eleyr 0 84 -1_ _Eley-Ur
Update Firmware
3
0 8 5 "K _Cony jittOefr
Update the Operating System...
4
0 8 6 "h_Conv_LEFT
Assign PG /PC
5
0 87
"Horn'.
New Options Werlow Help
2_1 ( KiJ
1 21T-2:1_ Isk411
I Display towel [ Status velool Modify velu' •fain B001. II Ids* 13001. BOOL lase . 13001. ■ leise false 1300L
Displays selected variable values for monitaing and canging.
5ER81_5157_300_5tabon
SIMATIC S7
Date
File
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Gibs
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.10
I=
time LEFT
Jog RIGHT I 0.2 Cony motor RIGHT (Q8.5) Lock-out RIGHT T 15 (SF)
-
Jog LEFT I 0.3
lock-out time RIGHT
Cony motor LEFT (Q8.6)
SetBit • *MA& Tag I InOutj • Activate w. 2 crio function>
- jud PRO1 Touchpanel IS 1E1 /3. Communicatior Tags My_Project
7>> >
M 17.0 M_Conv_Fault M_Conv Jog_LEFT_HMI M 30.3 M_Conv Jog_RIGHT_HMI M 30.2 M 30.5 _MiA_Accept_HMI MIA_Mode5elect_HMI M 30.4
New
I CI
Conv3og_RIGHT,EIMI
t
output
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Buttons
18.09.2009 SERV1 ji1E.15
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
The operator can use buttons to initiate system functions such as the selection of a screen or the setting of a tag as shown in the slide. Through the "Events" of a button, you define in which event which system function is to be executed.
Variable
If the selected system function is executed with a WinCC flexible tag, this tag must be specified. The WinCC flexible tag is, as a rule, linked to an S7 controller variable. It could, however, also be an internal tag that is not linked to an S7 controller variable, but is simply used to store values within the HMI device.
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 15 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
11
SIEMENS
Defining the Connection to the Controller fi'VrAnCE flexible 2005 Advanced - My_Project - TP170B_Color erniect Lclit Yew Insert Dern& Fapeplates gptions Jndow Help :)-- New • kW ig In • la ' 1 ■., 1) “ Y:. 1 4
i iEnosh (United States)
,j11 :1 Options 1 > Set PG/PC Interface
SIMATIC NET diagnostics - CP5611(PROFIBUS)
PROFIBUS/MPI Network Diagnostics
Hardware I
— Status/Network Diagnostics 10K
Test Access Path
Station address:
Bus parameters: Baudrate:
Access Point of the Application: I _ NLINE
(STEP 7)
--> CP5611(PROFIBUS)
Highest station address (HSA): Minimum station delay Time (Min Tsdr): Maximum station delay Time (Max T sal Setup time (tsetj:
(Standard for STEP 7) Interface Parameter Assignment Used ICP5611(PROFIBUS)
1r-4 CP5611fMPlj 1'4 CP5611(PPI)
Properties... Diagnostics...
_N --v>
11
o irirrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr ------
looFFEEFFErrrrrrrrrrrrr - - -nor r r r rr r Key E Station passive
- Interfaces
Read
Add/Remove:
Select..
OK Cancel
SIMATIC S7
Task
I
17 Station active F Station active ready
I
Cancel
j
I Help
I Help
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. AM rights reserved.
zi
20 I—
User parameter assignment of your communications processor CP5611 for SOFTNET DP Master)
OK
1 te it
Bus Nodes 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
ri rrEFFEEFF1 1 1 1 1 1 Fr 4C EFFErrr- rr-- 1-1-1-1-1-Fri- Frr 60 rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr 80 FrrEFFErri- r- rEFFI-1-1-1-1-
Copy
CP5611(PROFIBLIS DP Slave] J 14 CP5611(PROFIBUS)
1500.00 Kbps 126 11 tBit 150 tBit
18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.20
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Now connected to the PROFIBUS are: the PG (address 0, active) -
the touchpanel (address 1, active) the S7 controller (address 2, active)
-
the ET200S (address 4, passive)
Using the function "SIMATIC NET Diagnostics" (see slide), check whether all nodes are accessible via the PROFIBUS DP. What to Do
1. Start the diagnostic function SIMATIC Manager - Options - Set PG/PC Interface - Diagnostics... 2. Check the PROFIBUS network using the "Test" button 3. Using the "React' button, determine which nodes are accessible via the PROFIBUS.
Note
SITRAIN
The "active" and "passive" node properties indicate whether a node can (active) or cannot (passive) initiate communication to another node.
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 20 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
SIEMENS
Exercise 5: Checking the RT Interface of the WinCC flexible Station ❑ ri-k* l 1? gl
ei I
Irti 161 la
J 4p
EERVII ci II< No Filter >
MyProject 0: \Courses \MyProject MyProject E
Object name
S7_300_Station
/I CPU 315-2 DP 7 E sr S7progran rl•' HW Con ig - Tourhpant .12E1 Scrum Saban Edit Insert PLC View Block:
Touchpanel
Syrnteic
rit'•
D
$1 a I I
511 1
x
Typ General
L crt
P.,..met.
I
Address:
General I Assignment I F Short Description:
Highest address, 126 Transmission rale: 1.5 M bps Subnet not networked
Touchpanel (Configuration)
PROFIBUS 1
15M
Press Fl to get Help.
New
I
Pro:tartlet
I
Delete
I
Order No: Name: Interface
sI 4,116± (0) HMI Index
Module
Type:
7 1: I
Address:
1
Networked
Yes
OK
CarrlorM
I
Properties...
Comment
OK
Cancel
I
Help
Press Fl to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Task
What to Do
SITRAIN
18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.21
q.t.;
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
So that the panel's Runtime can communicate with the S7 station during the process control phase, the panel's interface must be parameterized with the HW Config tool. Using the HW Config tool, check the parmeterization of the panel's interface. If necessary (see slide) make the appropriate corrections.
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 21 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
11
SIEMENS
Exercise 6: Checking the Connection to the Controller ,d_cuLci MyProject ▪ S7_300_Station • :=4 Touchpanel WinCC flexible R T , Screens 17 5- Communication -ej Tags ,,s a Connections Cycles Flik Alarm Managemen vx Recipes El Reports ▪ Text and Graphics Runtime User Adm ▪ Device Settings
0•ect name
Info
eoiect Edit Dew Insert Fefe,ef Peceeletes Qvtsons Endow tielp New • I& A rn • x Engfnh Weed Knedom) 6?.1x, 0 Ran I .Stonnea■ons PRO Touollaare(TP 1778 6" J DJ IE-1 1 Saws Partner ▪ Communication .ML.i221 4- 0. 1 . 1 -44i===9=.1111111 11 Cornectionl Tags .15111111C 57 300/400 ViyProjectk57... : 1CPU 315-2 DP : 1CF ,0n 4-11-111-11 1 iar MI Cedes Open editor • ilk Alen Menegerren •-41 Reeiees Add Connection Reports at generate Tex and Graphics ® Manama User Adm Lind° Ctrl+Z BEI r- Devine Settings ▪ Language Settiigs Cuh Ctrl+X at &mimes E -Ws Vend, Mannerneni ra Spy Ctri+C NI device Netot,' Cp Fiat Copy
e
Paste Replace...
Ctrl+E
Delete
Delete
Print Selection tf
7 Output
SIMATIC S7
Highest stens address (HSA)
ALINE e bus
Number
of matters
Cross-References
R econnect...
File:
Date:
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
Ctrl+W
I: o
ProNe
Ctrl+V
SERV1_11E.22 18.09.2009
SITRAIN Training for
IlithiT Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
Make a connection so that the panel's Runtime communicates with your training unit.
What to Do
1. Start WinCC flexible by opening the WinCC flexible station Touchpanel in the SIMATIC Manager (see left slide) 2. Open the object "Connections" and check whether your S7 station is specified as connection partner. 3. Connect the WinCC flexible tags with the controller's variables right mouse button on "Connections" -4 Reconnect... 4. Complete the dialog that appears as follows:
FR Options for Reconnecting Symbols
—
Connect STEP7/SIMOTION symbols with WinCC flexible tags if
C symbol name, address and data type match a one or more of the following conditions are true: symbol name matches (address and data type are not relevant) 17 address and data type match (symbol name is not relevant)
l Replace tag name with symbol name
OK
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Cancel
4
ST-SERV1 Page 22 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
SIEMENS Exercise 7: Transferring the WinCC flexible Project into the Touchpanel
JJJ
"l' WinCC flexible Advanced - MyProject - Touchpanel
Project Edit Dew Insert Format Ptceplates Qptlons Endow deb S.- New • par
-
r • •-
11..g
-•
English (United Kingdom) Ld
• .................................
I& PRO Touchpanela Screens 11-
%'' Commune Tags
0 "n.
it, ' •
Touchpanel [TP 1778 6 c...
—Settings for Touchpanel (TP 1778 (i color PN/DP)
1"".5.11111. ES- -%Alarm Mari:. Recipes !! ! f $ Reports Text and' E8 IT] -4 Runtime I. . p. Y Device Sr Language Se p r5 Structures 111--%Version Mane
Mode
IMPI/DP
Station address
11
•
• • Arirlrecc
r Enable back transfer r Overwrite user administration r Overwrite recipe data records
Transfer
APPIY
*rums sabot access trDA)
4
4
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.23
Tr
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
The given WinCC flexible project "Touchpanel" is to be downloaded into the panel.
What to Do
1. Activate the Transfer function and make the settings as shown in the slide 2. Start the data transfer to the panel using "Transfer"
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 23 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
11
SIEMENS
Exercise 8: Testing the WinCC flexible Project DI I 0.0 I 0.1
\
I 0.2 I 0.3
)9
1 0.4
O
DO T_System_OFF T_Jog_LEFT
O
S_M/A_ModeSelectl
N
I 0.5
L MAN
•
Q 4.2
L AUTO
•
Q 4.3
GI
T_Ackn_Fault
1 1=1
1=1 =I 1=1 1=1
SIEMENS
L_Conv_Fault
•
O
• • •
N
SIMATIC S7
"QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)
SIMATC PiOJEL
Training for Automation and Drive
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
7
0815
• • •
)1D
ACTUAL Quantity
1=1
"IW_Thumbw" (IW 2)
T_M/A_Accept
\
r
Q 4.1
L_SYSTEry
T_Jog_RIGHT
O
N
SETPOINT Quantity
11
T_System_ON
18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.24
SITRAIN Training for
A• Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
The functioning of the WinCC flexible project "Touchpanel" is to be checked:
What to Do
Select the screen "Conveyor" and check whether the following information is correctly displayed via the output fields:
Note
•
States of the proximity sensors of Bays 1 — 3 and the light barrier
•
Display of conveyor faults
•
Operating states (System ON, Manual and Auto modes)
•
ACT quantity
What doesn't yet work: Operating the system or the conveyor (System ON/OFF, mode selection, specifying the SETPOINT Quantity, Jogging RIGHT/LEFT, Acknowledging conveyor faults) via the input fields is not possible at the moment since your S7 program in the controller has not yet been adapted accordingly. You will do this in the next chapter with the function "Rewiring".
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 24 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
SIEMENS
Exercise 9: Testing the WinCC flexible Buttons
Operand' Symbol
Symbolkommentar
M 30.0 "M_Anlage_EIN_HMI" Merker Anlage EIN (TP170)
Stahtswert
■take
M 30 1 "M_Anlage_.AUS_HMI" Merker Anlage AUS (TP170) IlltrUe
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Task
18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.25
1c
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
In the WinCC flexible project, find out with which S7 variables the buttons "System on", "System off', "Jog left", "Jog right", "Mode select", "Enter Mode" and "ackn fault" are connected and enter the variables in a Variable Table (see slide). In the "Conveyor" screen, press the buttons and with the STEP7 test function "Monitor/Modify Variables" observe how the touchpanel sets and resets the associated variables in the S7-CPU.
What to Do
1. On the touchpanel, select the screen "Conveyor". 2. Through the "Properties" of the buttons, determine with which S7 variables the buttons are connected. 3. Enter all the variables that you find out in a Variable Table. 4. One after the other, press all buttons and with the STEP7 test function "Monitor/Modify Variables" observe how the touchpanel influences the variables.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 25 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
11
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Note
SITRAIN
18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.26
„Xi SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
The following pages contain either further information or are for reference to complete a topic.
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 26 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
SIEMENS
PROFIBUS - DP Terminating Resistor
t
ft
of
0 .
The terminating resistor must be switched on at the beginning and at the end of the segment
iii
i
i 0
E
,
0
i 1 Ei m ' MI I Mf
M9I 1 NI
Slave
Slave
.
19 Resistor On
i
,,,,""..1
ii..l
Slave
Slave
Master
m II .1 •
0
: i
Elf
e Resistor Off
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Setting the Terminating Resistor
18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.27
2.1 SITRAIN Training for
gr
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Switch on the terminating resistor on the first and last nodes of a segment. To do this, you open the cover of the bus connector and set the switch to the ON position.
The PROFIBUS is only correctly terminated if the power supply of the node in which the terminating resistor is inserted is actually switched on. If this is not always the case, the PROFIBUS can also be terminated with an active RS485 terminating resistor (6ES7972-0DA00-0AA0). The terminating resistor is then either permanently supplied with power separately from the other modules or is supplied with voltage from the peripheral modules. Termination of the bus system enables the nodes (for example ET 200L) to be connected and disconnected at will, without causing malfunctions.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 27 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
11
SIEMENS
Segment Length Depending on the Baud Rate
Baud Rate 9.6 to 187.5
1,000 meters
500
kBaud
400 meters
1.5
MBaud
200 meters
3 to 12
MBaud
100 meters
Master
`o
— 0
i
I II
'
. .
0 0
Segment Length
kBaud
Slave
I
IMI I IM I
1
f
o
t
t:
li
Slave
I
t
I
t
M I I•1 t
i
0
1
I i IMI I I■1 i i I
.0
Slave
iii E 1
. . .. .
Segment Length
SIMATIC S7
Date: Files
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.28
SITRAIN RIZ"
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Segment Length
In the slide you can see the cable lengths of a segment without a repeater depending on the transmission speed.
RS 485 Repeater
An RS 485 repeater boosts the data signals on the bus cables and connects bus segments. You will require an RS 485 repeater, if: •
more than 32 stations are connected to the bus,
•
bus segments are to be operated ungrounded on the bus or
•
the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded.
If you set up the bus with RS 485 repeaters, only a maximum of 9 RS 485 repeaters may be switched in series. The maximum cable length between two nodes is 10,000 meters at 9.6 to 187.5 kBaud.
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 28 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
SIEMENS
Standard connector with screw terminal SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.29
n SITRAIN Training for An
gOr
Automation and Industrial Solutions
PROFIBUS Connectorin the slide you can see two different versions of the PROFIBUS connectors. The incoming cable is connected to the terminals Al and Bl. If a connection to a further PROFIBUS partner is required, the connection is then made to terminals A2 and B2.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 29 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
11
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.30
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
General
PROFIBUS cables can be produced quickly and error-free with Fast Connect. You require a special stripping tool, cable and connector for Fast Connect.
What to Do
1. Measure the cable length by placing the cable on the template. 2. Place the measured cable ends in the stripping tool. Limit for the placement depth is the pointer finger of the left hand. Fasten the cable in the stripping tool. Turn the stripping tool clockwise four times to strip the cable. 3. Pull the closed stripping tool from the cable end. The residual cable parts remain in the tool. After opening the tool you can remove the residual parts. If the white filling did not come off during stripping, you can remove it by hand. To make it easier to remove the protective foil cut it carefully between the wires using a screwdriver. Remove the protective foil from the wires.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 30 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
SIEMENS
Installing PROFIBUS-DP Slaves Later On
HW Config - IS7_300_Station (Configuration) -- My_Project]
1.1 atation edit Insert El-C 1
Dita:1:'1
11
view Option
1%1 dif
P117113
Window Help
Customize
; GSD-Datei for produkt 6F)0001-xxxxx, SIEMENS ; Version : (V2.0)-(Contact person Mr. Rechinger +49 9131 913 3955) ; Copyright (C) SIEMENS AG 1999 ; All Rights Reserved.
CtrkAlt*E
'L pecu Configure Network 'Lyrnbol Table Remit ,zrern Eiro:
flProfibus_DP
Eck Catalog Prone Update Catalog
PrmText=1 Text(D)= Increasing clockwise (0). Text(1 -Increasing counter clockwise (1)* EndPrmText PrmText=2 Text(0"Disable Text(1 -EnableEndPrmText PrmText=3 4 1
Instal HW Updates ... Instal New GSD... Import Station GSD...
Updates the catalog contents by checking al GSD and type Pies.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Type Files
Example of a Type File
18.09.2009 SERV1_11E.31
SITRAIN Training for Tr Automation and Industrial Solutions
STEP 7 requires a GSD or a type file for every DP slave, so that you can select the DP slave from the Hardware Catalog in the HW-Configuration tool.
All properties of a DP slave are stored in a GSD file and they conform to the PROFIBUS standard. Type files conform to the Siemens specification. For SIEMENS AG DP slaves, there is a type file for every DP slave type. DP slaves from other manufacturers are supplied with a GSD or a type file. Integrating DP Slaves
A new DP slave can be integrated into the Hardware Catalog as follows: 1. Select the menu options Options 4 Install New GSD 2. In the dialog field that then appears open the drive/directory with the appropriate GSD file. The slave is entered in the window "Hardware Catalog" (only in the catalog profile "Standard"!) under "Additional Field Devices" and is then available for the configuration.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Page 31 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
11
SIEMENS
Rewiring a User Program DO
DI .0 1 .2 .3
‘0 s e 0
s
.4 .5
e
s
T_System_ON L_SYSTEM T_System_OFF L MAN T_Jog_RIGHT L AUTO T_Jog_LEFT S_M/A_ModeSelect T_M/A_Accept
.6 7 .0
0
s
T_Ackn_Fault
L_Conv_Fault
.1 s
.3
s
.0
•
.2
•
.3
•
• • • • • •
•
e e
.2
•
•
•
4
0 0
.5
s
6
s
• •
•
.7
1
.4 .5 6 .7
Set_Quantity NI
0 0 1 5
.0 .1 .2 .3
SIMATIC PANEL
SIEMENS
.4 .5 .6
Ell
.7
•
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.1
C)
• • .
start screen
SITRAIN Training for =• Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page
Contents .....................................
2
Areas of Use .................................. Rewiring using Absolute Addresses
3
Rewiring Results
5
Leading Symbols .......................... Rewiring using "Leading Symbols"
6
Objectives
4
.................................
Rewiring with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor Rewiring with the "Check Block Consistency... " Function .........................
7 8 9
.......................................................
10 11
Exercise 1: Creating a Backup Copy of the S7 Program Exercise 2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses ..........
12
Exercise 3: Comparing Blocks
14
Comparing Blocks (1) Comparing Blocks (2)
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
.........................................
Page 1
13
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
12
SIEMENS
Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... know how rewiring functions and how to apply it be able to carry out a rewiring using the SIMATIC Manager be able to carry out a rewiring using the symbol table ("Leading Symbols") be able to compare S7 blocks online-offline and offline-offline
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.2
Page 2
4
1 SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
SIEMENS
Areas of Use program Operation via TP177B
program Operation via simulator
04.1
04.1 10.0
SR
SR
---
II
S
0
s
0
10.1 R
Rewiring • absolute addresse
Symbol information: T_System_ON T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM
I0.0 I0.1 04.1
"S_N/ "T H/ A_Accept"
A_ ModeSelect
"LHAN SR
s
II "l_STSTIHT"
Rewiring using symbolic addresses
Symbol information: H_System_OH_HMI 130.0 H_System_OFF_HHI 130.1 L sysnim 04.1
"M_M/ A_ "H M/ A_Accept_ ModeSelect HMI" HMI"
1I IA
Symbol information:
Symbol information: M_M/AAccept_HMI M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI L_SYSTEM LMAN
10.S 10.4 Q4.1 Q4.2
T_M/A_Accept S_M/A_NodeSelect L_SYSTEH LMAN
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.3
M30.5 M30.4 04.1 04.2
SITRAIN Training for gler
Automation and Industrial Solutions
• In all blocks, one address is to be exchanged for another. • In one module, a defective channel (input or output) is determined. If, on the same module or another module, not all channels are occupied, the sensor or actuator in question can be reconnected to the free channel. •
Rewiring
s
"L_SYSTEM"
IA
Areas of Use
MAN" SR
The program is to be adapted to another process in which the sensors or actuators are wired to other addresses.
The program must be adapted to the new situation by rewiring (inserting the new addresses in the program). There are three ways to rewire a user program:
SITRAIN
•
Rewire using absolute addresses (independent of the symbol table, Address Priority Absolute Value)
•
Rewire using symbolic addresses (Address Priority "leading symbols") - in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor - with the Check Block Consistency function
•
Rewire using a source program
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 3
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
12
SIEMENS
Rewiring using absolute Adresses !SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project — DA57_Courses \My_Proje]. File Eck Insert PLC View Options Window Help
g?
IF.
S7_300_Station CPU 315-2 DP Ch13_1.114420 E a Sources
E
Customize... Access Protection Change Log
Ctrl+Alt+E
Y.#
Filter >
I Th
MI I k?
Size in the work me...
Text Libraries
SDB 134 Organization 124 Function
FBD FBD
Language for Display Devices... Manage Multilingual Texts
FBD
104 Function 100 Function 76 Function 64 Function 112 Function
a MICRO
2 TP1708_
Compare Blocks... Blocks: FC14:FC15fC16.FC175C18;FC195C42;0111
Blocks: FC14;FC155016507501850195C42;0131
Replacements:
Replacements: Ord address
flew address
Old add, ess
M30.0 M301 M30.2 0.430 3 M30.4 M3OS 131.0 1
2 3 4 5
6 7
2 3
•
5 6 • 7 — ET 7
Note. Insert Row
Delete Row
Cancel I
SIMATIC S7
Delete Row
O
..V141accesses Help
hin the specified addresses (not for peripherals)
OK
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
I
pred Row
4
r All accesses withrn the specined addresses [not lot peripherals]
OK
..
NOW addr
18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.4
Cancel I
(
C
Help
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Rewiring...
Independent of the symbol table, the old addresses (in the example, bits of the IW 0) are replaced with the new addresses (in the example, bits of the MW 30) in the existing user program. The original blocks are overwritten with the new, rewired blocks. When you rewire using absolute addresses, you must select "Address priority: Absolute value" in the Blocks folder's Object Properties.
...in Specific Blocks
If you are only going to replace the addresses in one or several blocks, you have to select these blocks before you start the function.
...in All Blocks
If you are going to rewire or replace the addresses in all blocks, you have to select the Blocks folder of the S7 program before you start the function.
If you check (activate) this option, the individual bits of the specified byte, word ...All Accesses Within the Specified or doubleword addresses are also rewired. In the example shown, all bits of the "old address" IWO are rewired to the bits of the "new address" MW30. What to Do
SITRAIN
1. In the SIMATIC Manager select the Blocks folder or the blocks to be rewired 2. Choose the setting "Address priority: Absolute value" SIMATIC Manager - Edit 9 Object Properties 4 Address Priority tab 3. Start the rewiring SIMATIC Manager 9 Options 4 Rewire... 4. In the Rewire screen, enter the old and the new addresses and, if necessary, activate "All accesses within the specified addresses" 5. Acknowledge with "OK"
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 4
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
SIEMENS
Wiring Results • FC15 — "FC_Mode" -- SERV 1_5 57_300_5tationt,CPU 315-2 DP \—\FC15
FC15
Title:
jj
Ilet.mork 4: System alum ..... :
•.
•
04.1 SR
N1S.1
4
.
4 -'
Symbol informmtlma:
T_System_ON M_Aux_System_ON T_Systea_OFF L_SYSTEM
41 I
• FC15 "FC_Mode" SERV I _5 57_300_Station \ CPU 315-2 DP
PCIS : Title: Zttttla: System ON/OFF .....
04.1 SR
M15.1 Tr
'
aI
Symbol information:
M30.0 MI5.1 M30.1
M_System_ONFRII M_Aux_System_ON M_System_OFF_HMI l_SYSTEM
04.1
-----
Memory bit System ON (TP170) Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON Memory bit System OFF (TP170) Indicator light System ON
41 I
SIMATIC S7
11
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.5
Mg
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Result
In the rewired blocks and/or in the entire user program, the old addresses (in the example, I 0.0 and I 0.1) have been replaced with the new addresses (in the example, M 30.0 and M 30.1). The old blocks (FC 15 in the example) have been overwritten with the new ones.
Rewiring Protocol
After rewiring, you can print out a protocol which shows how many replacements were made in which blocks:
r
chwinlo.txt - Editor
Datei Bearbeiten Format Ansicht ?
Address list: Old address: Iwo Block list: FC14: Number of replacements:2 FC15: Number of replacements:8 FC16: Number of replacements:4 FC17: Number of replacements:1 FC18: Number of replacements:0 FC19: Number of replacements:0 B1: Number of replacements:0
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 5
New address: MW30
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
12
SIEMENS
Leading Symbols ...11:11A1 ..1.2121
6i LAD ,'511 .FEID - [FC15 --"FC_Mode"-- SERVI_S S7_300_Stritto Hn. Cl. File Edlt Insert PLC
Debug View Options Window Help
1:11 41-.1121
ell b ji
Ned !‹1›,!1 o_jr gg
F
7C15 Title: System OM/011, •T_System-
"N Aux
_SYSTEM SR
System P
oN"t
Q8.0/ L_SYSTEM j Indicator ight System
ea_ '4 Symbol Table: Address Priority:
Address Priority: Old Entry:
Absolute Value
1: Etta
LAD , STL ,F1313 - [FC15 "FC Mode -- SERVLSV
Cl• Ile &It Insert
9tetion \CPU
PLC Debug Vow OptionsV
f2LJ
D102-1 611 A1
.11
-11-1+1-1-01EIL, -11}-t1
A ;
L_SYSTEM = Q8.0
ON"
PLC Deism
New Entry:
ill sk
L_SYSTEM = 04.0
J®
Window Het.
41-1{
=tom System ON/OCT
mtmixis System ON/OFP •T System_
4: Address rim
MEDI=
Symbols
•N
System ON"
•T_Sys.A._ 077 •
vi
er
thj 14 4 P 14
1: Eno
A
2 1r4o A
3 Cseeteletences
Press Fl to got Help.
SIMATIC S7
Adams iJo. loffline
A 5: M. bs
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
FI
211111111.e
ter A
21NO
3Gesaelemnces
Press Fl SCO Help.
18.09.2009 SERV1_126.6
_A
Address into. IthIn.
Oh. "
_11 SITRAIN Training for
nr
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction
If you want to change the assignments in the symbol table of an already existing program, you can also decide whether the absolute address or the symbolic address has priority.
Selection
In the SIMATIC Manager, right mouse click the "Blocks" object of an S7 program. Select the Object Properties menu option and then the "Blocks" tab. You can choose between "Absolute Value" or "Symbol" in the "Address priority" field.
Address Priority:
With this setting, the absolute address of an operand does not change if you change the address assignment in the symbol table later on. In the example above, the output Q8.0 (symbol name "L_SYSTEM") was changed to output Q4.0 in the symbol table. With the "Address Priority: Absolute Value" setting, the program continues to use the output Q8.0.
Absolute Value
Address Priority: Symbol
With this setting, the absolute address of the operand is changed to the new entry in the symbol table (functionality: "Rewire with Address Priority: Symbol"). In the example above, the output Q8.0 (symbol name "L_SYSTEM") was changed to output Q4.0 in the symbol table.
Note
When you change the address priority later on, you must recompile all blocks with the function "Check Block Consistency... 4 Program 4 Compile All" Without this compilation, the changed address priority is only valid for blocks that are created after the address priority change.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 6
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
SIEMENS
Rewiring using "Leading Symbols" jij m 2si
Syr SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project ER,57_Cour
80 Fie Edlt beat PLC VIew Options Wmdow Help
❑ re.irl' el c [47111,161[i 2E1 2g --- ET-- VIVI 1
Object Hierarchy.
Cut
S7 program Call Tree [References I "FC_Mode" [FBD] • FC15 "FC_Conveyor" IFBDI • FC16 'TC_Faults" [FBI)] • FC17 ''FC_Math" [FBD] • FC19 "FC_MM420" [FBI)] • FC42 "Main_progiam" [FBI)] • OB1 "FC_Mode" [FBD] FC15 "FC_Conveyor" [F131/] FC16 FC17 "FC_Faults" [FBD[ "FC_Math" [FBI)] FC19 "FC_MM420" [RD] FC42
COW
Copy
Delete
Del
Insert New Object PLC Rewiring.. Compare Blocks... Reference Data
STEP7 Project: D: \ S7_coueses \My_Proje program' My_Prolect1Demo_5 Bausteme
Check Block Consistency...
program setting address alio* Symbol. Number of Blocks: 6 The 57 program contains blocks of the folovang editors.
Pont Rename Object Properties... Special Object Properties
F2 Att+Return
FBD
►
57 ptoryam Cal Tree (References "FC_M ode" [FBD] FC15 "FC_Conveyor" [FBD] FC16 "FC_Faults" [FBD] o FC17 "FC_Math" [FBD] FC19 "FC_MM420" [FBD] FC42 "M am_program" [FBD] 0 081 "FC_M ode" [HD] o FC15 O FC16 "FC_Conveyor" [FBD] "FCFaulte [FBD] o FC17 o FC19 "FC_M ath" [HD] "FC_MM420" [RD] o FC42
2Into less F1 for help.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved .
18.09.2009 SERV112E.9
SITRAIN Training for gr
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Rewiring
After you have set "Symbol" as the address priority in the Object Properties of the Blocks folder and then adapted the absolute addresses in the symbol table, you can proceed to rewire with the function "Check Block Consistency... ". This is a good method when addresses are used in several blocks, since the blocks affected do not have to be opened.
What to Do
1.
IP I
SITRAIN
In the SIMATIC Manager, right click with the mouse on "Blocks" and select the menu option Check Block Consistency...
2. If there are blocks that are displayed in red, a compilation is necessary. You can trigger this compilation with the icon.
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 9
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
SIEMENS
Comparing Blocks (1) Compare Blocks - Results
Compare Blocics Type of comparison:
t"; ONLINE/Offline
r
The block comparison resulted in the following differences: Path 1/F
Path 1:
P Including SDBs Pr Execute code comparison
r Including blocks created it different programming langi.
Path 2: ONLINE ISERV2_32S \Chapter6 \Blocks Storage Location I
Selected Path 1:
ISERV2_32S1Chapter6\Blocks
Storage Location: ICAS7_Courses1Sery2_32
SERV2_32S■Chapter6
Block List:
Blocks
Block FC1
Result of compartson xJ only exists in Path 2 ONLINE
Compere with. Path 2:
OK starts the ONLINE/0in
I
r
Canc
OK
Hide instance data blocks of the same length e:
I
lemesetless
! Path I
Lag radars chow s woop IM Sloo cheas,rn Oxf138.4 II. Created In bronco LAD Tad length of block 410 bytes go Length et bed data 6 bytes Length of eK7 code 310 bytes lock yenta 2 .11Name (Header)
„bki,Vciclgs are different.
Path 2 OMNI
051039 PM. 1110712000 OSM:511P1
0
OxA743 LAD 410 bytes 6 bytes 310 bytes
Details
2
Close
0.1
Clew I
Go To
— Update
I
Pant
I
Help
mi Mate
SIMATIC S7
...see next page4 Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18n9.2009 SERV1_12E.10
ge
l SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction
You can compare blocks between online and offline data management or between two user programs on the hard disk of the PG. With this function, you can determine whether, for example, program corrections were made in the CPU later on and in which network the blocks differ.
What To Do
1. With the right mouse button, select the Blocks folder of an S7 program. 2. Select the Compare Blocks menu option. 3. Choose whether you want to compare online/offline or between 2 offline programs and acknowledge with the "OK" button. 4. In the follow-up screen, the blocks that differ are listed. 5. Select the line in which a difference was determined and then select the "Details" button. 6. In the "Compare Blocks - Details" window you can ascertain when the block was modified and if the block length was changed. 7. After you select the "Go To..." button, the differing block is opened online and offline in two windows, for example, and the network, in which the first difference was determined is displayed.
Note
Program corrections can only be made in the offline window.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 10
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
SIEMENS Go To...
Comparing Blocks (2)
--.
,..Lcij id
-._ He Edt Insert PLC Debug View options Window 11*,
❑Ir1-1®I ell x Nei .L-1-_j Lkkii F ezj thl nrit Li' • FCI7 — SERY2_325 \ •
-H-144-1-nr771
14-I .1211
"M_Feultl" —Freport_liessory
"N_Feul tl" —Repot t_Dersory i,, _Fault.l. Edge _Edge_rieaory_B
eul tl_Edge
Edgefienory_13 —it
e 2
Net
Network 11: Eveluetton Disturbance 2
"DB_Instence F eult2"
"DBInstance_F sal t2" EN
"FBFaults" _
EN
A
Disturbence_I "4_Fault2" —nput
Display-89.4
Al A
ENO
_J
Display -89.2
"T_Ferul t_Itst^ —Acknowledge Flash_f re guen "2 Hz" — cY
Flesh_f re quen "2 Hz" —c1`
1
"FEI_Faults"
Disturbance _I "4Fault2" —zPut
"T_Feult_Ret" —Acknowledge
4
_IIoJ al
• .s.al,I. -
• Ilk•i::E.•..
,_1P_125.1
2
1
Le-..: I 0,1 :
1.4 4 ijj\ 1. ii.i 1u
Next
I
1:Effo
,
,10 ,,...
?: Cros eferencas
I
,,pdare
7: Coe arson J
4 Address info.
I
Press Fl to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
Differences
18.092009 SERV112E.11
0111111.111.11 Abs < 52
144 4
P----
SITRAIN tr
g
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
After you select the "Go To..." button (see previous page), the Program Editor is opened with two windows side-by-side, in which the network with the first difference is displayed. You can navigate between the differing networks or program locations using the "Previous" and "Next" buttons.
Example
SITRAIN Training for
In the example shown above, the blocks of two different S7 programs are compared in an offline - offline comparison. Both S7 programs contain an FC16 block, but each have a different program code. You can read out which of the two blocks was the last one saved or which has the newer date from the time stamps in the "Compare Blocks - Results" screen.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 11
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
12
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Creating a Backup Copy of the S7 Program
JJJ
VSIMATIC Manager - [My_Project D:\ST_Courses \My_Projej gp File Edit Insert PLC
View
Options Window He
Rkeltal E
My_Project SIMATIC 300(1 111 CPU 315-2 DP F, E CID Source Blocks E sr My_Program E
2
-41227:-EElint
Object name
Symbofic name
=LJ XI
1_1 70
No Filter
ig I %Fl
Type
Size Author
Source Folder Block Folder Offline 53198
1. Make a backup copy as a hardware-independent S7 program
La 10 09 10
--/
2. Rename the original program
lussigrom
Press Fl to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.12
‘1r „
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
Before you rewire your S7 program, you are make a backup copy. This backup copy is to be created as a hardware-independent S7 program in the project.
What to Do
1. With the mouse, drag your S7 program called "My_Program" directly onto the project symbol so that the copy is assigned to the project as a hardware-independent S7 program (see slide). 2. Rename the original S7 program assigned to the CPU "Rewire".
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 12
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses Simulator
DI I 0.0 \ID I 0.1 \D I 0.2 \c, I 0.3 I 0.4 \D I 0.5 O \
DO
T_System_ON T_System_OFF
L_SYSTEM
T_Jog_RIGHT
L_MAN
T_Jog_LEFT
L_AUTO
SIMATCPANEL
• • Q 4.1 • Q 4.2 • Q 4.3
-
©0 =
•
S_M/A_ModeSelect
•
T_M/A_Accept
C 3 - 7
• •••
•
O
N
O
\
, 20
1=111111■1111■11■1111Matak .... Blecke FC145C155C165C175C185C19fC42.GB1 RadxenaMx Old address I
10.0
C:)
El
H15.1 P
New addroos
3 4 5
04.1 SR
.1
3130.0
Effi
VI
E
I
Rewire
1115.1
04.1 OR
0
30.1
El I
r
Notes Spiel tagesatioa: T_System_ON I0.0 M_Aux_Systea_OH 015.1 T_Systa._OFF I0.1 L_SYSTEN 04.1
il
medRom •• P /8 acmees within the spec:tied addresses (not fee Petherals1
Delft Row
S3441m43. lasfmertion: H_Syscem_ON_HHI H30.0 H_Aux_Systes_OH H1S.1 M_System_OFF_HKI H30.1 1_SYSTIM 04.1
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.13
IC
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task 1
The S7 program is to be adapted in such a way that operating the system or the conveyor model (System ON/OFF, operating mode selection, specifying the SETPOINT quantity, jogging RIGHT/LEFT) is no longer done via the simulator but is done via the touchpanel. You are now to make the appropriate adjustments to the S7 program with the function "Rewire".
What to Do
1. In the S7 program called "Rewire" select the property "Address priority: Absolute value". SIMATIC Manager 4 select the Blocks folder of the S7 program 4 Edit 4 Object Properties 4 Address priority tab 2. Activate the "Rewire" function. SIMATIC Manager 4 select the Blocks folder of the S7 program 9 Options 4 Rewire... 3. In the table of the Rewire dialog, enter the old and the new addresses and activate (check) the option "All accesses within the specified addresses" (see slide). 4. In FC 17, the input "T_Ackn_Fault" (I 1.0) has been replaced with the memory bit M 31.0. Modify the block in such a way that you can acknowledge a conveyor fault (M17.0) either via the touchpanel (M 31.0) or, as before, via the simulator momentary contact "T_Ackn_Fault" (I 1.0). 5. Download all blocks into the CPU and test the functions 6. The (hardware) NC contact "T_System_OFF" (I 0.1) has been replaced with the (NO contact) memory bit "M_System_OFF_HMI" (M 30.1). Modify FC 15 so that the system can be switched on again
Result
With the exception of specifying the setpoint quantity, you can operate the system completely via the touchpanel.
Task 2
Modify the program of the FC 19 block in such a way that the setpoint quantity no longer has to be specified via the BCD thumbwheel buttons on the simulator but can be made via the corresponding input field on the touchpanel. Solution tip: The touchpanel transfers the setpoint quantity specified in the "Parts Setpoint" input field into the variable "MW_SETP" (MW 22).
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 13
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
12
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Comparing Blocks
.. C1■LAD 511 (BD FT 15 -- "I I moth, Insert
nlryl coo + .J
ofra;12-lial J x FC_Plode- - mael
n FCIS
-
PcIS
JQJJ
PLC Debug Mew Options Verde" Help
_5 \57_3003tation\CPU 315-2
plum ...121z1
..
"FC.Iiode — SER1/1_S 57 3003tatimo \ CPU 315-2 DP \
FC1 5
FC1S : Title:
Title:
MUM:
11-141-1-01ff'11.1-1.1 -1 ff FC15
MOM System ON/OFF
system 01/011
.
.
IO.o
54.1
011.1
SR
1
:M30.0 %
Q
015.1
04.1 SR
:50.1 1 4
I
• e T.
1--‘7l a! lafeammtion: /0.0 010.1 $0.1 04.1
T_System_ON M_Aux_Systea_ON T_Systam_011, L_V/STIN
-----
Momentary cont■ 14g. auxiliary Momentary COD, Indicator ligt :tr ml
Symbol lateaantioa: 5500.0 M_System_ON_HMI 5515.1 M_Aux_System_ON 5510.1 M_System_OFF_HM/ 04.1 L_TYSTIff
-----
Memory bit Edge auxil Memory bit Indicator
■ 11
[EI DC111111111=1/WEEW Press II to pet E
a Cross-references
4 Adders info
.
MIELL"
5: M
F-0 loots
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_12E.14
7: lIME I
A
SITRAIN Training for V ir
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
With the "Compare Blocks" function, check the changes you made during rewiring. To do so, compare the rewired S7 program called "Rewire" with the backup copy of the original program called "My_Program".
What to Do
1. In the SIMATIC Manager select the Blocks folder of the program "Rewire" and start the "Compare Blocks" function SIMATIC Manager - Options 4 Compare Blocks 2. In the follow-up dialog box choose "Type of comparison: Path 1/ Path 2". Then, in the SIMATIC Manager window, click on the Blocks folder of the S7 program called "My_Program" and start the function via "Compare". 3. The box "Compare Blocks — Results" appears. Use "Go To..." to display the different versions of the FC 15 block
Task Expansion
SITRAIN
Also compare the program stored online with the current program called "Rewire".
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 14
ST-SERV1 Rewiring a User Program
SIEMENS
Introduction to Micromaster MM420
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_138.1
▪
SITRAIN Training for
•
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page
Contents Objectives
.......... 2
Principle of an Inverter Overview: Standard Drives
.......... 3
Communication: PROFIBUS DP Main Tasks of the Master — Slave Communication
..........5
Structure of the Control Word Integrating a Drive in the HW-Config
.......... 7
.......... 4 ........ 6 .......... 8
BOP (Basic Operator Panel) Standard Operator Panels
.........9
Keys on the Operator Panel PROFIBUS Communications Module: Setting the Address
........10
Exercise 1: Reset to Factory Default
....... 12
Exercise 2: Controlling the Micromaster via the BOP Exercise 3: Setting the MM420 Parameters with the BOP
.......13
Exercise 4: Integrating a Drive in HW-Config
....... 15
Exercise 5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel
....... 16
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 1
...... 11
...... 14
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
13
SIEMENS
Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... understand the principle of an inverter be able to reset the inverter to factory defaults be able to operate the BOP standard operating panel be able to set basic parameters using the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) be able to integrate the Micromaster into the hardware configuration be able to monitor and control the Micromaster
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.2
Page 2
4
1 SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
SIEMENS
Principle of an Inverter Infeed (Rectifier)
DC link
Power module (Inverter)
zs Three-phase mains system such as 3 AC, 400V, 50 Hz
AA
Induction mo Or Variable speed
Inverter
Voltage
Voltage
41111•1111011•111107-
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Direct On-line Operation Motor Starter Inverter
The Way it Works
Configuration Rectifier
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.3
Voltage
,111,1111111, WNW SITRAIN Training for gir Automation
and Industrial Solutions
Three-phase AC motors (here: induction motors) can be operated directly on the three-phase mains system. They are switched on and off by means of a contactor (= relay for high currents). For example: a pump for a water storage tank. To achieve a smooth start-up, a reduced voltage starter (= motor starter) is frequently used. After start-up, the motor is then operated directly on the mains. For example: the drive of an escalator. If the motor speed is to be variable, an inverter is used. For example: the drive of a container crane. Some applications require a precise adherence to a predefined speed. This is frequently connected to positioning tasks. These are then servo drives. In simple terms, servo drives are used everywhere where movement used to be carried out manually. For example: machine tools, packaging machines, robots. With a rectifier circuit, the three-phase current of the public supply system is rectified. This results in a DC voltage that is buffered by capacitors (DC link). A power module with transistors generates a three-phase current with variable frequency and voltage from this DC voltage. Variable voltage? The motor represents an inductive resistance for the current flow. With rising frequency the inductive resistance increases. For that reason, the inverter must also increase the output voltage proportional to the output frequency. It is possible to connect several power modules for several motors to a rectifier (such as SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES). If a rectifier circuit with transistors instead of diodes is used then electrical energy can be fed back into the system during ramping down.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 3
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
13
SIEMENS
Overview: Standard Drives
4. c7=
Application example: Controlled pumps and fans in an air conditioner
MICROMASTER 4 Inverter (here the different sizes with a performance of about 0.1 to 250 kW)
SIMATIC S7
Application example: Conveyor belt
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.4
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Categorization
Standard drives are used for applications that only require a low to medium dynamic as far as speed control is concerned. Many applications in the past used to be driven with three-phase motors connected directly to the mains. In the 90s, inverters became so economical that the advantages of a speedcontrolled drive could be utilized in many areas (energy savings in the partialload operation, smooth ramp-up and controlled ramping down, quality improvement in production).
Design
The MICROMASTER inverters are now in the fourth generation. They are "Stand-Alone" devices. That is, the inverter is complete and is connected between the mains and the motor. The MICROMASTER 4 inverter family comprises several versions: MICROMASTER 420: for simple control requirements such as pumps and 430: fans. MICROMASTER 440: for demanding control requirements (dynamic and precise speed control). MICROMASTER 410: for the simplest requirements with only a limited ability to parameterize. MICROMASTER 411: the integration of motor and converter (= COMBIMASTER). The inverter is located in a special housing piggy-backed on the motor.
Applications
• • • • •
SITRAIN Training for
Pumps and fans (for heating, air conditioning, ventilation, chemistry, foodstuffs ...) Conveyor belt systems (for packages, baggage, mail) Automatic doors ([house] entrances, elevator doors, garages) Washing machines, dryers and ironing machines (industrial field) Car washes ...
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 4
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.5
l
•
ittT
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Field Bus
A field bus connects distributed sensors and actuators (such as, valves, light barriers, measuring devices, drives, operator control panels) with the central PLC. PROFIBUS DP is a manufacturer-independent, open field bus. PROFIBUS has been standardized and continuously further developed by the PNO (Profibus User Organization) since 1990.
Master-Slave
The master (usually a PLC with a PROFIBUS interface module, such as, S7-315-2 DP) controls the data communication on the bus. Slaves only send data when they are prompted by the master. That way, no collision results between two senders.
Cyclical Range
The slaves are cyclically (= one after the other) supplied with process data by the master and their process data is scanned. In Drives, process data are, for example, • speed setpoint, switch-on signals from the master or • actual speeds, error signals from the drive. The data telegrams consist of 2 to 16 words (a 16 bit). Cycle times lie between about 2 to 20 ms.
Event-driven Range
As well, there is often the need to read or change the parameters of a drive. This occurs (in today's applications) only when prompted. The cyclic operation is then briefly interrupted and a longer data telegram with up to 117 words is sent.
Master Class 2
The "normal" master is called Master Class 1. For commissioning, you can also connect a PC or PG (= SIMATIC programming device) as a Master Class 2. Independent of the actual data communication, the Master Class 2 can access the drives.
PROFIBUS Address
The minimum requirement for commissioning the PROFIBUS option module is the setting of the PROFIBUS address.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 5
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
13
SIEMENS
Main Tasks of the Master — Slave Communication Master-Slave Communication Reading and writing of parameters Reading out of fault and diagnostic values Reading and modifying function values
Controlling the drive process Permanent setting of control bits and setpoints Constant reading of status bits and actual values
Parameter index value (PKW)
Process data (PCD)
Panama_ Size of the main setpoint Source of the main setpoint
}to the inverter
Level of the control bit
Source of the control bit
Size of the main actual value
}from inverter
Level of the status bit
How does data transmission take place? • •
Only triggered if required Freely accessible to all parameters
SIMATIC S7
• •
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Fast and permanently triggered With fixed "wiring" to the process
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.6
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Process Control
Fast data transmission of short data telegrams to all participating stations with the maximum speed available on the bus. In drive systems these are typically setpoints, control commands, status replies and actual values (measured values).
Operating Control
In addition to this permanently available data, there is data that is only needed in particular cases. It would therefore be senseless to permanently put load on the bus if this data is only needed once per hour or per day, for example, when starting up the machine (Class 1 Master). Another reason for an expanded communication need could be the commissioning, optimization or diagnosis of machine components from a central location. In this case, (such as a fault) a detailed access of an Engineering Tool to the system components or the drive is enabled. Since, as a rule, only one affected device/component is directly addressed, this window is only made available once per bus cycle for one bus station and not simultaneously for every station.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 6
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
SIEMENS
Structure of the Control Word . ..... E : 15 14 13 12
9
8I7
6
= Motor ON
F
:
7
4
0
W # 16 #
7
4
0
W # 16 #
5
Rising edge for switching on !
:13 =
Motor OFF
4
L
ON/OFF 1 OFF 2 - OFF 3 - Pulse-Enable Ramp-function Generator-Enable Ramp-function Generator-Startup Setpoint-Enable Fault-Acknowledge JOG right - JOG left - Control from PLC - Reverse --- Motor-Poti up - Motor-Poti down Command Data Set Bit 0
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.7
glkT
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Control Word
The control word (bits 0 to 10) conforms to the Standard PROFldrive Profile. Bits 11 to 15 are MICROMASTER-specific.
ON/OFF1
To switch on the inverter, a rising edge of this bit is necessary, and the bits OFF2 and OFF3 must have the state = 1. When switching off via this bit, the motor is braked on the braking ramp of the ramp-function generator (P1121) and the inverter then switches off.
OFF2
The inverter switches off immediately and as a result the motor ramps down without braking (coasts to a standstill). To switch the inverter on again, this bit must be set to 1 once more and a rising edge at ON/OFF1 is necessary.
OFF3
The motor is braked on the OFF3 braking ramp and the inverter remains switched on. This function is often used as EMERGENCY STOP.
Note
For reasons of wirebreak safety, the inverter is always switched off if the signal state of the associated OFF bit is = 0.
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 7
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
13
SIEMENS
Integrating a Drive in the HW-Config station Edit Insert
izi.c Dew
=0A
be
Qptkins Window
iai; :-I5g s7_300_5tation (Configuration) -- MyProject
CPU 315-2 DP
II
np
Properties - PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PR General
L
PROFIBUSI11. DP
master system (1) End froliec
Parameters I
E d SIMOREG dSIMOVERT E al LARGE DRIVES CBP2 MASTERDRIVES CBP MASTERDRIVES CBP2 0-/MIDI-/COMBIMA al 1 ' ► ASTER 4 E • BIMASTER 411
E
Address.
Transmission ra Subset:
IDriyeES
General Dove Unit / Bus Address "-
Zevice type:
I'
Device version
HMI=
r
General Crnfifit.elim I Dala Etc:honor Broadcast • Overview I Qefralt
PPO type 3. PZD-2/2
•
0111221:11 1 MIIMIM111111111111111
MICROMASTER 430
mirRnmAqun tidy!
8
1PBOO-C1 A0 (4M4B) ASTER 420 wilh US Interface (see Ord& ES / SIMOTION
Delete slot Mastatislave configuration 1 121DP Mester. Stat., S7
OK
Staten
Corrrrent
Cancel
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
General
Properties Dialogs
I
'I*
Training for S lN A iT utomati on and Industrial al Solutions
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.8
The cyclic data exchange between CPU and MM4420 via PROFIBUS must be configured in HW Config.
The following properties are defined in the dialogs: PROFIBUS interface: PROFIBUS address and subnet SINAMICS: Firmware version of the Micromaster (to be found on the nameplate of the MM420 such as, "Issue: A06/1.17") DP Slave: In addition to the I/O addresses for data exchange between CPU and Micromaster, the type of communication must be defined here: PPO Types: (Parameter Process data Object) The structure of the user data for the cyclic data exchange is identified as the PPO Type in the PROFIBUS profile for Variable-speed drives. The PPO types 1 to 5 have a defined number of PKW (Parameter Index Value) and PCD (Process Data): PPO Type 3 permits a simple data transmission with which the controlling of the Micromaster is possible as well as the specification of the speed setpoint and the reading out of the speed actual value. With PPO Type 1, you can also change all drive parameters per CPU program.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 8
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
SIEMENS
BOP (Basic Operator Panel) Standard Operator Panels BOP (= Basic Operator Panel)
SDP (= Status Display Panel)
Setting parameters (changeable parameters):
Index of a parameter (sub-parameters):
Parameter keypad for easy commissioning or changing individual parameters
As delivered from factory LED Status display
SIMATIC S7
Monitoring parameters:
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.9
SDP
The MICROMASTER is fitted with the SDP (= Status Display Panel). The MICROMASTER is already parameterized in such a way that it can be operated through the terminal strip. The SDP has a status indicator with a green and yellow LED (16 different messages).
BOP
The BOP (= Basic Operator Panel) can be ordered as an option. It is inserted instead of the SDP — temporarily for commissioning or long-term. Available functions are: •
LCD display with 5-digit 7-segment display and unit symbols (Hz, min-1, V, A, kWh)
•
Access to all parameters up to Access Level 3 (Expert)
Parameter List
Unlike a PLC controller (SIMATIC), drives are not programmed. No program is written. Settings are made in parameters. The basic program in the digital drive is fixed and is called firmware. By assigning parameters, the inverter is adapted to the task.
Indexed Parameter
Many parameters contain sub-parameters. Parameters with similar functions are often grouped there.
Monitoring
Some parameters are only used to display values. So that you can differentiate them from the others at first glance, an "r" (= read only) is placed in front of them instead of a "P".
Parameters
Trigger Parameters
SITRAIN Training for
Some parameters can only be changed from 0 to 1. An internal action in the MICROMASTER is usually triggered with this, for example, Reset to Factory Default.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 9
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
13
SIEMENS
Keys on the Operator Panel
,. 1
.
0 Start the converter with parameterized ramp-up time Bring the converter to a standstill with parameterized ramp down rate. Press twice and the converter coasts to a 0 standstill.
iI rj u.0 nnn u (r
r
Fri
A
log
P
1
0 Changes the direction of rotation e)
C
Parameter access. Is used to select the parameter number and to accept the value
CI
Increase parameter number or value
s
MICROMASTER
420
.. .•• 4... . iii .......— • ,....., PC.A.54 .11 Ble f
'
,
1, “
Motor starts and rotates at the preset jog frequency. Motor rotates as long as the button remains pressed
0 0 SIMATIC S7
Decrease parameter number or value This key has a series of functions: - Roll function to display the 5 most important values - More exact setting of parameters, e.g. decimal places - Jump to Parameter 0000. The display shows r0000
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.10
A
NZ
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Access Levels
For simple applications, only a few parameters have to be changed. For complex applications, an "exotic" parameter may be needed from time to time. For that reason, access levels were established in parameter P003: • Level 1 = Standard: Only the 17 most important parameters are displayed • Level 2 = Extended: In this level, additional parameters are visible for the input and output terminals, as well as for communication through field bus or for example, for the setpoint channel • Level 3 = Expert: Here you have access to all necessary parameters. For the MICROMASTER, this is about 600 parameters • Level 4 = Service: Some specific parameters are only meant for authorized service personnel. The level is protected by codeword.
Command Source
Commands are: on signal, off signal, jog, and acknowledge fault messages, for example. On the training unit, you can select the following sources using parameter P0700:
Setpoint Source
SITRAIN Training for
•
P0700= 1
•
P0700 = 2
BOP operator panel Switches S1-S3 on the demo case
•
P0700 = 6
From the CPU through PROFIBUS
Setpoint is, the inverter frequency, for example. On the training unit, you can select the following sources using parameter P1000: •
P1000 = 1
BOP operator panel with the higher/lower buttons (only with r0000)
•
P1000 = 2
Potentiometer on the demo case
•
P1000 = 6
From the CPU through PROFIBUS
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 10
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
SIEMENS
PROFIBUS Communications Module: Setting the Address
Switch number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Add to address
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
Example 1: Address = 6
off
on
on
off
off
off
off
Example 1: Address = 88
off
off
off
on
on
off
on
Some addresses have a "particular meaning Address
Meaning
0
PROFIBUS address is specified by Parameter P0918
1 to 125
valid PROFIBUS address
126, 127
invalid PROFIBUS address
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
‘
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.11
1 1 SITRAIN Training for
17
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Attention
The minimum requirement for commissioning the PROFIBUS communications module is the setting of the PROFIBUS address.
Setting
You can set the PROFIBUS address in two ways: - through the 7 DIP switches on the module or - through Parameter P0918
Note
To change the DIP switch, the inverter must be in a switched off state (no voltage) (for already mounted communications module). A change to the DIP switch only takes effect after the PROFIBUS module is restarted. The restart must be triggered by a Power OFF / Power ON. This is true for an inverter supply as well as through a separate 24V supply.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 11
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
13
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Reset to Factory Default Parameter
Value
Comment
P0010
30
Reset to Factory Default
P0970
1
1111101111
End
11111/141.1111.1
S1 = Drive On/Off
P0010 = Commissioning filter P0970 = Reset to factory defaults P3900 = End of quick commissioning
LI
S2 = Reverse direction of rotation S3 = Acknowledge fault H1 = Fault (is lit when there is no fault) P1 = Potentiometer for the frequency/speed
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.12
,
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
First of all, carry out a Reset to Factory Default to establish a defined initial state.
Factory Default
In the factory default, the inverter is already functional. It is parameterized for a 4-pole Siemens motor with the same power rating as the MM420 and can be controlled via the binary inputs (see slide).
What to Do
1. Change the parameter P0010 to the value 30 2. Change the parameter P0970 to the value 1 3. Wait until the P---- indicator "disappears" on the display 4. Test the inverter using the switches and potentiometer on the demo case (see slide)
Quick Commissioning
If Parameter P0010 is set to the value 1, the quick commissioning mode of the inverter is activated. Only the most important or the most frequently required parameters are displayed. The quick commissioning mode is always required when motor (characteristic) data are to be changed. With the end of the quick commissioning via Parameter P3900, additional parameter data are recalculated out of the changed motor data: •
P3900 = 1
4 Reset to factory default and motor data calculation
•
P3900 = 2
- Only motor data calculation 4 Reset the parameter assignments of inputs and outputs
• P3900 = 3 This procedure is also described in the "Getting Started" Guide that is included with every unit. We will not practice the quick commissioning in this exercise.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 12
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Controlling the Micromaster via the BOP
Parameter number
Value
Comment
P0700
1
Control signals from BOP
P1000
1
Frequency setpoint from BOP
• • •• 11 • •• Reverse direction
ON—. OFF1—.
With selected Parameter r0000: ncrease frequency Decrease frequency
Jog operation (set-up operation)
SIMATIC S7
Date File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.13
_27 SITRAIN Training for
Nt;
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
Switching on and off as well as the specification of the drive's speed is to be done via the BOP operator panel.
What to Do
1. On the BOP, set the parameters shown in the slide to the specified values 2. Switch on the motor using the ON key 3. Select the parameter r0000 using the arrow keys and press the P key so that the current frequency is displayed 4. Change the frequency and with that the motor speed using the arrow keys.
Note: Arrow Keys
Pressing the higher/lower (arrow) keys only affects the speed when the parameter r0000 is selected and the parameterization mode has been exited via the P key. Otherwise the arrow keys continue to used for assigning parameters. Changing the frequency or the speed using the arrow keys is also called motor potentiometer (MOP).
Jog Key:
The drive or motor can be jogged using the Jog key. By default, the control signals and the setpoint come from a SIMATIC S7-CPU. When setting up the drive or in the case of service, it can become necessary to control the MM420 "by hand" using the Jog key. The Jog key only functions in the ready state. That is, the signal OFF1 = 1. The frequency is 5 Hz in the factory default.
Fn Key
With the "Fn" (Function key) key, you can carry out the following actions: • acknowledge alarm and fault messages when the error no longer exists • jump between decimal positions in parameter changes • display important inverter data, such as, voltage of DC current link (Roll function when "Fn" key is pressed for 2 seconds).
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 13
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
13
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Setting the MM420 Parameters with the BOP If the PROFIBUS address was set from the hardware side, P0918 can only display
Parameter number
Value
P0003
2
Expanded parameter access
P0700
6
Control signals from PROFIBUS
P0918
6
PROFIBUS address of the MM420
P1000
2
Frequency setpoint from Potentiometer
P1120
2.00
Ramp-up time 2 seconds
P1121
2.00
Ramp-down time 2 seconds
.__
Comment
Setpoint before ramp-function generator:
50 Hz
Setpoint after ramp-function generator:
Internally generated / ction Setpoilt frequency ramp-fu
Setpoint frequency 50 Hz
AIL P1120
P1121
1
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.14
4
1 SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
The drive is to be assigned parameters in such a way that it receives the control signals from the CPU via the PROFIBUS.
What to Do
Use the BOP to set the parameters as shown in the slide.
Diagnosis
An LED is located on the front of the PROFIBUS-DP interface of the MM420. The following table explains possible LED displays and error causes and helps you with the following exercise:
Off
no power
Red flashing
invalid PROFIBUS address (126/127 is invalid) or hardware / software error
Red on
temporary state during startup or new communication configuration; if constant state, then PROFIBUS interface or inverter defective
Orange flashing
communication to inverter built-up; no connection to PROFIBUS, or PROFIBUS connector not inserted or faulty or PROFIBUS master is switched off.
Orange on
communication is established, but no cyclic data exchange is taking place.
Green flashing
cyclic process data exchange exists, but setpoints are invalid (control word = 0, because S7 master is in the "STOP" state, for example.
Green on
cyclic process data exchange is established.
Ramp-up Time
Internally, the setpoint value changes according to a step function. To achieve a controlled ramp-up transition, a ramp-function generator is integrated that generates a ramp-type setpoint for the controller.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 14
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Integrating a Drive in HW-Config :HW Coring - S7_300_5tation
aCation Edit Insert eLC Dew Qptions Window help
J o ci:1-ez wu a R2Ielimilimitolialtel LZS7_300_Station (Configuration) -- MyProject
CPU 315-2 DP OP Properties - PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PROFIBUS General
L
JJ
PROFIBUS(1) DP master system (1)
El 0 SIMOREG 0 SIMOVERT ID 0 LARGE DRIVES CBP2 ■ MASTERDRrVES CBP MASTERDRIVES CBP2 0-/MIDI-/COMBIMA ASTER 4
Parameters
Address:
Genetel Drive Ur / Bus Addle.
Transmission ra
BIMASTER 411
Qeace type
5ubnet:
Des,ice yeeson
ilei" Slat t 4 6
rI PPO type 3 F Tt 2/2
Nero Type A. WON
PROFBUS partner PR... 4/0 e._ Pro... Length 1 L0 Type
Actusiviss/... 2D1 Inratoeut
.2
1=1- - • 2
—
Conaste
1Nerel UMW!
I
Cl
MI"! MICROMASTER 430 mirP MASTFP
1P800-0AAO(MM4B) TER 420 with US Interface (see Order e ES / SIMOTION 10
-
— Merle-sieve conlIguation 1 — 121 DP Menem S7_300_Station Stelon
OK I
OK
I
Comment
_J Cancel I Hein
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.15
gr
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
General
The cyclic data exchange between CPU and MM420 via PROFIBUS must be configured in HW Config. Proceed as follows:
What to Do
1. Activate the HW Config tool. 2. Open the HW Catalog and set the Profile "DriveES". 3. From the SIMOVERT 4 MICROMASTER4 directory, select the Micromaster 420 and drag this onto the PROFIBUS DP mastersystem using drag and drop. 4. In the "Properties — PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PROFIBUS" screen, enter the PROFIBUS address 6, select the subnet and confirm with "OK" 5. In the "Properties — SINAMICS" screen, choose the device version "1.0x" or "1.1x" that fits for your training unit. You will find this version on the MM420's nameplate (such as, "Issue: A06/1.17") 6. In the "DP Slave Properties" screen, in the "Configuration" tab, select PPO Type 3 and assign the I/O address 42 for data exchange with the CPU (see slide). 7. Save, compile and download the configuration into the CPU.
Result
When the MM420 has been successfully parameterized and integrated in the hardware configuration of the S7 Station, the LED of the MM420 PROFIBUS interface shows a green flashing or constant light.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 15
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
13
• SIEMENS
Exercise 5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel SIMATIC PANEL I
4C.42 z
CPU
Meter as
•latemor•
.••••• -
“gm.
I
e. am '1•F— 0111•11•71
.• ti
om
P R
..••• Control_•
je.zo-
• • .• 40.0m1 lageenatlanz 11 14 4:0_0,12.11 ,4_70ntat.12121430
0
M40. 0 .3t4J
Jyttch On Mulors tat M430 .1,1701 -- Control word tor 1115.1j0
Mlmenr. z 1•41.t. Motor Ogg
F
•. ILM420 • 014_11110 •_ •
yjp.'=ew
so
111161143I —xx
B U
••00 * Con;rel_ . 114214120• • tr.....
1171.40 1:014•44441.gaz On 102 =
S
11111110111:
D
M40 0 OW42
Stmtch On genory Olt MM430 17,1701 -- Control word for M430
Jo g Motor flat
044;'''''' 11 14 '''' ' • 4. JogIIIM_ Jog_14/7. 'X 111420 MS' On 1017- 4 ..., * 1---/1-0—;70=M X110
•
P
.............. 141:1167-IM
Control_ . 20' . ................................... 1•••• 111•1•01 1•01440.04.04: MM5430_J g CMMI MJ143_Jo g _IFT__01 _M11430_0n_1171:3 OV_Contr ol101430
-- :Unary tat M420 Jog IS M 111.170. -- Nemo, hat M11430 Jop 1Mt 111.1707 Sto.tth On gentry bat M11430 170170. -- Control word for MM400
1140. M40.3 M40.0 12 10,
A SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_13E.16
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
You should be able to switch the drive on and off from the touchpanel. During switched off continuous operation, the MM420 can be jogged to the right and to the left via the appropriate keys; during switched on continuous operation, it turns at the speed that is set on the potentiometer of the MM420 training unit.
What to Do
1. Copy the "FC_MM420" (FC 42) block from the project called "SERV1_B" located in the S7 program called "Chap13_MM420" into your S7 program. 2. Put the block into operation 3. On the touchpanel, activate the screen "MM420" 4. Test the functions described.
Notes on the Program
The QW42 output word declared by you in the Hardware Configuration serves as so-called "control word" for the MM420. Per program you can control the MM420 by transferring defined values. The values (HEX constants) specified in our example have the following meanings: in NW1: W#!16#47F = switch on the drive in NW2: W#16#47E = switch off the drive in NW3: W#16#57E = jog the drive to the right in NW4: W#16#67E = jog the drive to the left
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 16
ST-SERV1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
SIEMENS
Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.1
gir
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page
Contents
......... 2
Objectives Other Documentation Tools
............ 3
Block Documentation
............ 4
Page Setup Print Preview Managing Multilingual Project Documentation
............. 5 ............................ 6 ........... 7 ............8
Overview: Saving User Data Uploading an S7 Program from the CPU to the PG
............9
Uploading a Hardware Station to the PG (PLC Copy)
........... 10 ........11
Transferring a Program onto a Memory Module Saving a Project onto a Memory Card Loading a Project from the Micro Memory Card (MMC)
......... 12 ........13
Archiving a Project Memory Concept of the S7-300 until Oct. 2002
.......................................................14
Memory Concept of the S7-300 after Oct. 2002 Memory Concept of the S7-400
..........16
......... 15 ......... 17
Exercise 1: Documenting a Block and Printing It Out
........ 18
Exercise 2: Saving the Program and Hardware Configuration (PLC Copy) ........ 19 Exercise 3: Archiving "My Project" .............................................................................................................20 If You Want to Know More
......... 21
MMC - as Additional Data Memory on the CPU PLC: Storing Data on the Memory Card
........ 22 .......... 23
PLC: Getting Data from the Memory Card
..........24
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 1
ST-SERV1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIEMENS
Objectives Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ... be familiar with the documentation possibilities of blocks understand the "Managing multilingual project" function be able to print out programs understand the memory concept of the SIMATIC S7-300/400 be able to make a "PLC Copy" (online data storage) be able to load/read a program to/from a Memory Card be able to archive/retrieve a project
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.2
Page 2
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIEMENS
Other Documentation Tools Reference data
Program structure Cross references Assignment of I/Q/M/T/C
Unused addresses
Checklists
Addresses without symbols
Symbol table
Configuration
Network configuration
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.3
_21 SITRAIN Training for r
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Reference Data
If you print out the reference data it makes troubleshooting, in particular, easier. You will find more information in the "Troubleshooting" chapter.
Symbol Table
The symbol table contains the association between absolute address, symbol names and symbol comments. See the "Symbols" chapter for more information.
Configuration
Configuration data generated with the "Hardware Configuration" tool. The printout is in text form. If you want a graphic printout, you can copy the graphics onto the clipboard and then paste them in another program such as Winword and print it out.
Network Configuration
Displays in graphic form the stations of a networked system with the relevant configuration data such as the MPI address.
Printer
The printer used for documentation is the one installed under Windows. If you want to use a different printer, you must set it up with the Windows Control Panel.
DOCPRO
The DOCPRO optional software is also available for superior documentation and for writing wiring manuals.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 3
ST-SERV1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
14
SIEMENS
Block Documentation ,i_ol ,i ,
pLAD/STL/FBD - [FC4 -- My_Project \My_Station\CPU 314] Ck He Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options ,.
DI ;[ I-1611
,
AI xltilal -1 -1
Window Help
Eldhl F
_J 1 1 nig 1-1d
-11-
Er= Ill
--06_Cycle FC_S ignal FC_M ode FC_ConvM otor FC_F ault FC_Count FC_Count_Add VAT I/0-Conveyor
.•
Created in Ian, a. .._ LAD STL LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD LAD
I
2.11 7 /,1 ,jinjal
21 System data C} FBI
Cl. F Cl 4 0. FC17 0. FC20 0. DB2
0 OB1 0. FB20 ci. FC15 0 FC18 0 FC42 0. DB3
0. OB100 0. FC1 0. FC16 0. FC19 o 0131 oDB19
(This window can only be selected if the Memory Card is inserted in the PG ) ICP5611(PROFIBUS)
Press Fl to get Help.
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserve,'
Prerequisite
18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.11
itt-
SITRAIN
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
The memory module (Memory Card or MMC) must be inserted in the PG. As well, the Memory Card driver must be loaded in the STEP 7 software. If this is not the case, you can install the driver via "Start" 4 Simatic STEP 7 Memory Card Parameter Assignment" Then, the "Memory Card" icon exists in the SIMATIC Manager's toolbar.
Erasing the Memory Module
Before you can transfer the program onto the memory module, the memory module must be erased. The Memory Card can always only be erased completely. That is, individual blocks can not be erased or overwritten.
Transferring the Program
1.
Note
With most of the CPUs, the Memory Card can also be written in the CPU using
In addition to the project window, open the Memory Card in a further window in the SIMATIC Manager ( File 9 S7 Memory Card 9 Open) 2. Arrange the Project window and the Memory Card window one below the other as shown in the slide. 3. In the Project window, in the appropriate Blocks folder, select the desired blocks and drag them with the mouse into the Memory Card window.
PLC Download User Program to Memory Card
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 11
ST-SERV1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
14
SIEMENS
Saving a Project onto a Memory Card _,L51.1 c1
Manager - Nyproject (Component view) -- si-Courses My_proje)
et) Fie Edit Insert rPtc View Options Varelow
D114:I ail,
Acce" RCit'
E
Dowrioad
MV_Porocl E SIMATIC 3( E • CPU 31 El cam
a
tiI2!
EIC.343 test station 91 ED LI Chacter12
,12.111 c
Nab
J Yo
I < No Flue >
I Created in Anoxia,
Compie/Downbiel Proyams...
'13141
_I Sin in the wok
FBD
upload
FBD
Ibload Station Copy RAM to ROM...
OIL 08
Downbad user program to memory card
Retrieve from Maxey Card... ManageC17 S, itern... Drive Display Accessible Nodes
Display Force Values McmitorlModfy Variables
STEP 7Daa Caaulawaw Ma ma wawa* P Cieeipreo
aaa Taraawavlbe waradaial Varna POWarawkaad
Diagnostic/Setting PROFIBUS Assim Monet Address... Assign PGIPC Cancel PGIPC assignmer Update Operating System...
area Soechit
mix OP tr NC pa mix a.m.*. x aiX re Pao/MIX aw
1
:J 41 fEM i
J
Saves desired data to the Memory Card.
SUM.loWatta PLC May Led
_J SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.12
_21 SITRAIN Training for
'lltr
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Function
With the functions "Save to Memory Card..."and "Retrieve from Memory Card...", you can save and retrieve the complete data of a project (user programs with all comments, symbol tables, hardware configurations etc. from all hardware stations) on a memory card. The memory card can be located in a CPU or in the memory card programming slot of a PG or PC. The project data are compressed before they are saved on the memory card and are extracted when retrieved. The size of the project data to be saved corresponds to the archive file size of the project. If the memory capacity of the memory card is not sufficient a message will appear indicating so.
Project Data with / without User Program
Similar to the archive of a project - the project data contains all data belonging to the project and all user programs of the CPUs. The user programs contained in the project data can not be read by the CPUs and thus cannot be executed. With the option "Load the user program also", the executable user program is also stored in addition to the project data. This user program is the one assigned to the CPU on which the memory card is inserted.
Area of Use
If several co-workers in the service and maintenance area have the job of maintaining the SIMATIC S7 PLC, it is difficult to quickly provide every worker with the current project data for a service assignment. When the project data are available locally in one of the CPUs to be maintained, every worker can access the current project data and make changes, if necessary, which in turn are current and available to all other workers.
Note
The functions Save to Memory Card and Retrieve from Memory Card are unrestricted in the S7-400 system. They are available for the S7-300 system after Oct. 2002.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 12
ST-SERV1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
▪
SIEMENS
Loading a Project from the Micro Memory Card (MMC)
a
File Edit Insert
Al Ia' MILO 'IN
PLC View Options Window I1
olad 1?1,1 PROFINET 10 111 SIMATIC 3C CPU 31 E E CJ Tes E RE C7 Testprosran
Access Rights Doe.inioad
!keine system... Ctrl+L
is name
Configure...
KNOW HOW protec...
Load mem EPROM
Compile/Download Programs... Compile and Download Obje:ts.
EPROM
Upload to PG
Upload Station to PG... Copy RAM to ROM...
Modified Adobe Acrob... 06.02.2001
Download user program to memory card
Save to Memory Card...
...
Manage M7 System... Drive Display Accessible Nodes
I7 Li /Referent Michael lemon
CPU Messages... Display Force Values Monitor/Modify Variables Diagnostic/Setting
V tSofivare STIA_PRO123_v55 •
o abc
AX NF ZZ
File type:
PROFIBUS Edit Ethernet Node,..
OK
Asnon PG/PC
F N
Cancel PG/PC As5i:,,,,r[v. Retrieves desired Nes se
Update Fume
P
Documents and Settings f.D DOTS_SWP RECYCLER i SIMATIC 57 - Projekte L-I SIMATIC 57 Archrve
0,th.; 157 COUSeS
Update the Operating System...
OS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.13
Mauer ordneri
I
SITRAIN Training for • .Automation and Industrial Solutions
P
Introduction
With the PLC 4 "Save to Memory Card" and PLC 4 "Retrieve from Memory Card" functions, you can save all project data and any files you wish for a later application on a Memory Card and then you can retrieve it later on. The functions for saving project data and retrieving from the Memory Card are, however, only available for newer CPUs (after Oct. 2002). The project data is compressed (zipped) before it is saved on the Memory Card and is unzipped when it is retrieved. The size of the project data to be stored corresponds to the archive file size of this project.
Application
If several employees in the service and maintenance department are responsible for maintaining the SIMATIC automation system, it is difficult to quickly provide each employee with the current project data and possible service instructions that exist in file form. If, however, the project data of a CPU is available locally in one of the CPUs to be serviced, every employee can access the current project data and, if necessary, make modifications, which in are then available for all other employees.
Operating
If the project data does not exist on the programming device used (PG/PC), you can select the source CPU in the window "Accessible Nodes". Open the window "Accessible Nodes" with the menu options PLC - Display Accessible Nodes and select the desired Connection/CPU with the Data on the Memory Card. Now select the menu options PLC 9 Retrieve from Memory Card. In the follow-up dialog, choose the data to be transmitted and the project path.
Note
You can protect CPUs against unauthorized access by using a Password. See the Hardware Configuration chapter for more information.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 13
ST-SERV1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIEMENS
Archiving a Project
IA=1===11111M1011111M111=1111V File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help New...
Ctrl+N
New Project' Wizard... Open...
EI- *I d II
Close
1_179 113
111111111•11112k
Archiving User projects I Libraries I Sample projects I Multiprojects I
Multiproject
Name
57 Memory Card
Storage path
MyProject
D: \Courses WyProject
Memory Card File Save As...
Archiving - Select an archive -:
Delete...
Archive That Goes across Diskettes:
Reorganize... Manage... EMEZI Retrieve...
I N°
r Incremental Archiving r Reset Archive Bit r Check Consistency
>
Print Page Setup... 1 57 memory card 2 Loesungsprojekt_PRO 3 SERV1 5 (Project) —
User projects: Libraries: Sample projects: Multiprojects:
File name:
4 SERV1_13 (Project) — Exit
OK
14 I
OK
IMyprojec zip
Cancel I Help
Save I
Save as lype: I PKZip 12.0-Archive('.zip)
Cancel
ell)
Lit Saves project or library (compressed) h an archive.
SIMATIC S7
A
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.14
V
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction
Since the data in a project can take up a lot of memory space and might not fit completely onto a disk, an archive function is provided. This archive function compresses the data so that it only takes up approximately 1/8 of its original amount of memory. It uses the normal file compression utilities, such as PKZIP, ARJ, LHARC, RAR or WINZIP. One of these programs must first be installed on the PG/PC. If you want to use long file names for the projects, you will need PKZIP, WinZip or RAR. The ARJ and PKZIP file compression utilities are supplied with STEP 7. You set the path for the archive program by selecting the Options - Customize 4 Archive menu options in the SIMATIC Manager.
Archiving
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Retrieving
1. Select the File 9 Retrieve... menu option. 2. Select the "Look in: " location where the archived file is stored and select the "File name" of the archived file and "Open". 3. In the next dialog box, select the destination directory and "OK". 4. Use the last dialog box to select options for overwriting and restoring the storage path
SITRAIN Training for
The project to be archived must be closed in the SIMATIC Manager. Select the File 4 Archive... menu option. Select the project to be archived in the dialog window and press "OK". Select the "Save in:" path and "File name" in the next dialog box. In the last dialog box, you can choose between the following options: - Archive That Goes across Diskettes = Can split the archive file onto several diskettes = Only the files with the ACR - Incremental Archiving attribute (STEP7 files) are archived. Archive only the files that have - Reset Archive Bit = been changed since the last archive. Compare the files to be archived = - Check Consistency (only for ARJ)
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 14
ST-SERV1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIEMENS
Memory Concept of the S7-300 until Oct. 2002 Load memory: Blocks: • Logic blocks > (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) Additional info
Comments
-a-rn
RAM
Flash EPROM
Working memory: • OB,FC,FB
Symbols Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB)
Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) Additional info
=
DB n. reten.I reten.
With Power ON without battery backup
11111
System memory: • PII,PIQ • M, T, C n. relent reten.
Retentive memor
7
• Retentive M, T, C • Retent. Data blocks
Flash EPROM Memory Card in PG (inserted later in the CPU)
SIMATIC S7
Date File
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
With Power OFF without battery backup
18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.15
l
ikiT
z SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Load Memory
The load memory is a component of a programmable module. It contains load objects (logic blocks, data blocks, and additional information) created on the programming device. The load memory can either be a plug-in memory card (EPROM) or an integrated RAM.
Work Memory
The work memory (integrated RAM) contains the parts of the S7 program relevant for running your program. The RAM work memory is integrated in the CPU and is backed up by the battery.
System Memory
The system memory contains the memory areas for: • Process image input and output tables (PII, PIQ) (M) • Bit memories • Timers (T) • Counters (C) • L stack (L).
Retentive Memory
The retentive memory is a non-volatile RAM used for backing up bit memories, timers, counters and data blocks even if there is no backup battery. A Flash EPROM Memory Card must be used to do this. You specify the areas to be backed up when assigning the CPU's object parameters.
Inserting a Memory Card
When you insert a memory card, the operating system requests a memory reset. (STOP LED flashes slowly). You perform the memory reset by turning the mode selector to the "MRES" position. The sections of the program relevant for execution are then transferred from the memory card (with load memory function) to the work memory. You must leave the memory card inserted while the program is being executed..
Memory Reset
During a memory reset, all user data - with the exception of the diagnostic buffer and the MPI parameters - are deleted.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 15
ST-SERV1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIEMENS
Memory Concept of the S7-300 after Oct. 2002 Micro Memory Card (CPU load memory) Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) • System data
Comments Symbols
4j
Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB)
.
Load
Working memory: Sections of the • logic blocks
-
Power OFF
• data blocks relevant for execution
Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) • complete project, if desired
Warm restart after Power ON
System memory: • PII, PIQ • Local data Micro Memory Card in the PG (inserted later in the CPU)
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Load Memory Micro Memory Card (MMC)
L
• M, T, C
Power OFF retentive n. retent.
11 SITRAIN Training for
18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.16
W.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
The Micro Memory Card (MMC) is used as the load memory of the CPU. It is used to store logic and data blocks as well as the system data (hardware configuration, communication connections etc.). If you like, the complete project can be stored. That way, you have the symbols, comments and configuration data, for example, for HMI or drives, available. The MMC contents are retentive. If a block or the entire user program is downloaded into the CPU from the PG, the information is stored on the MMC. All block sections relevant for execution are automatically copied into the work memory (RAM). It is only possible to load a block or the user program as well as operate the CPU when the MMC is inserted! A memory reset is required every time the MMC is pulled or inserted!
Work Memory
The work memory (RAM) is integrated on the CPU and only contains the parts of the S7 program relevant for running your program (such as, only the current values of the data blocks, not the initial values).
System Memory
The system memory contains the memory areas for: • • • • •
Retentive
Process image input and output tables Bit memories Timers Counters Local data
(PII, PIQ) (M) (T) (C) (L)
All data that are saved in a power failure and/or which don't lose their contents are considered retentive. This is all the work memory data as well as the bit memories, timers and counters declared as retentive in the hardware configuration. Retentiveness is achieved in that the above-mentioned data are stored on the MMC in a power failure and are written back to the RAM after a warm restart when the power comes back on.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 16
ST-SERV1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIEMENS
Memory Concept of the S7-400 Load memory: Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) Additional info
Comments
Working memory: • OB,FC,FB
Symbols Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB)
Blocks: • Logic blocks (OB,FC,FB) • Data blocks (DB) Additonal info
RAM
Flash EPROM
Backup via battery
• DB System memory: • PII,PIQ • M, T, C
rm.
-111
Flash EPROM Memory Card in PG (inserted later in the CPU)
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_14E.1 7
SITRAIN Training for Rtr
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Load Memory
The load memory can either be a plug-in memory card or integrated RAM. In the S7-400, the memory card (RAM or Flash EPROM) expands the internal load memory. A memory card is always required for the S7-400, since the internal load memory only has a limited size.
Work Memory
The work memory contains only the data relevant at runtime. The RAM work memory is integrated in the CPU and is backed up by the battery.
System Memory
The system memory contains the memory areas for: • Process image input and output tables (PII, PIQ) (M) • Bit memories (T) • Timers • Counters (C) • L stack (L).
Memory Card
When a RAM memory card is used, the system must be operated with a battery. The battery backs up the data on the memory card and any internal RAM in case of a power failure. When a Flash EPROM memory card is used, the user program is stored in the memory card making it power failure safe. The data found in the internal RAM are backed up by the battery. The "Hot Restart" mode is possible only in a backed up system.
Inserting a Memory Card
When you insert a memory card, the operating system requests a memory reset (STOP LED flashes slowly). You perform the memory reset by turning the mode selector to the "MRES" position. The sections of the program relevant for execution are then transferred from the memory card (load memory) to the work memory. You must leave the memory card inserted while the program is being executed.
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 17
ST-SERV1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
14
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Documenting a Block and Printing It Out NV Dcoicc‘NY NC-etion■ CD13 314 \ • -A MIN - Options
>=1=1.111.11 Access Path 1 Access Point of the Appkation
(Standard for STEP 7) Interface Parameter Assignment Used Properties
1CP5611(M PI)
Diagnostics
CP5611(MPI) CP5611(PPI) CP5611(PROFIBUS - DP Slave)
_J
Copy..
CP5611(PROFIB US)
zi
Delete
MPI
— Station Parameter-.
r PG/PC is the only master on the bus Address: ID
Parameter assignment of your communications processor CP5611 for an MPI network) — Interfaces
-
Timeout
Select...
Add/Remove:
11 s
Network Parameters -
OK
Cancel 1
He
Transmission Rate:
1187 5 Kbps
Highest Station Address.
131
OK
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_15E.5
Default I
Cancel
I He
I
_21 SITRAIN Training for gr
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
Depending on the type of CPU used, it could be that after the CPU memory reset the PROFIBUS interface is no longer parameterized and so the PG can no longer access the CPU. If this is the case, the PG's interface has to be switched to MPI and connected to the MPI interface of the CPU.
What to Do
1. Using the "Accessible Nodes" function, check whether you can set up a connection to the CPU. SIMATIC Manager 4 PLC 4 Display Accessible Nodes If you can not set up a connection to the CPU: 2. Activate the "Set PG/PC Interface" function SIMATIC Manager 4 Options 4 Set PG/PC Interface 3. In the Properties dialog, change the properties so that they appear as those shown in the slide
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 5
ST-SERV1 Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Deleting an Old Project and Retrieving a New Project V5IMATIC Manager - MeinProjekt File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help New... New Project' Wizard... Open... Close
Retrieving - Select an archive
Ctrl+N Ctrl+O
JJ
Li 4- C(3 de El'
Look jn: t;:_) Archive SERV l_A. zip SERV I _B. zip 11 SERV I JtartUp.zip 4
Multiproject 57 Memory Card Memory Card File Save As...
Ctrl+S
Reorganize...
File name:
2pen
I SERVl_StartU p. zip
Files of lype: I PI(.74. 1 2.0-Archive (".zip)
Pitt Page Setup.
SERVI_Startlip D: Courses SERV1_StartUp
1 Loesungsprojeld_PRO1 V59 2 SERV1_5 (Project) — D:\Courses\5ERV1. 3 5IZRVI_B (Project) — DACoursesliSIERVI. 4 SERVl_A (Project) — DACcurseASERVI Exit
Object name E
S7_300_Station CPU 315-2 DP ID 0 Chap15_StartUp al Sources Blocks E MICROMASTER_420 Touchpanel
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
S7_300_Station Touchpanel
E
a
_1J xl Symbolic SIMATIC 300 SIMATIC HMI MPI PROFIBUS
VMPI(1)
VPROFIBUS(1)
4l
18.09.2009 SERV1_15E.6
SITRAIN Training for
r,
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task
Delete — insofar as it exists — the old project "SERV1_StatUp" and then retrieve the project archive "SERV1_StatUp.zip"
What to Do
1.
Delete the old project "SERV1_StatUp"
SIMATIC Manager - File - Delete... - User Projects
2. Retrieve the project archive "SERV1_StatUp.zip" SIMATIC Manager - File - Retrieve...
3. As the destination directory in the dialog, select the directory in which your project "My_Project" has already been stored Result
SITRAIN
...is the retrieved project "SERV1_StatUp" that you are now to commission.
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 6
ST-SERV1 Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Hardware Commissioning ji_1 :1 2 I
08.4
MW20 — IN1 MWZ2 — INZ
Symbol information: MW_ACT MW20 MW_SETP MW22 L_AUTO Q4.3 L_Bay-LB Q8.4
-----
Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp. Indicator light Automatic mode Indicator light Light barrier bay
Network 5: Display the actual no. of parts L8CD EN MWZO — IN
Symbol information: MW_ACT truzo QW_DigDisp 0.16
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
ENO OUT —QW6
-- Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts -- BCD digital display
Page 16
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch10, Ex3 - 4: Lock-out in FC 14 FC14 : Indicator Lights Horn Network 1: Indicator Light Bay 1 18.5
18.6
M17.0
Q8.4
IA
VI
IA
I/I
VI
18.5
18.6
M10.5
M17.0
Q8.4
II
III
VI
Q4.3
08.5
I I
Q4.3
II
I
I
IA
Q4.3
08.5
110.3
.1 I Symbol imformatioa: Q4.3 Q8.5 18.5 18.6 M17.0 08.4 M10.5 110.3 08.1
Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 1
L_AUTO R_Conv_RIGHT BAY1 BAY2 MConv_Fault LBay-LB M_Flash_lHz /1 Flash_ZHz L_Bayl
Network 2: Indicator Light Bay 2 Q4.3
08.5
18.5
18.6
117.0
Q8.4
II
IA
IA
IA
VI
IA
04.3
18.5
18.6
110.5
117.0
08.4
I1
VI
11
II
VI
VI
Q4.3
08.5
110.3
08.2
I I
Symbol iaformatioa: 04.3 08.5 18.5 18.6 M17.0 Q8.4 M10.5 110.3 08.2
-- Indicator light Automatic mode -- Run conveyor RIGHT -- Proximity sensor Bay 1 -- Proximity sensor Bay 2 -- Memory bit Conveyor fault -- Indicator light Light barrier bay -- Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz -- Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz -- Indicator light Bay 2
LAUTO RConv_RIGHT BAY1 BAY2 MConvFault L_Bay-LB M_Flash_lHz MFlash_2Hz LBay2
Net-work 8:Horn Q8.5
04.2
1 I
1
I110.3
Q8.7
I
08.6 I 1
Symbol information: 08.5
Q8_6
04.2 M10.3
Q8_7
K_Conv_RIGHT K_Conv_LEFT L_MAN
M_Flash_2Hz Horn
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Run conveyor RIGHT Run conveyor LEFT Indicator light MAN mode
Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Horn
Page 17
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch10, Ex3 - 4: Lock-out in FC 16
NW 1 and NW 2 are not modyfied
Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor Motor in AUTO Mode
18.5
1 I
18.5
18.6
1/1
1116.4 SR
18.1
Q—
18.6
Q4.3
I/I
18.0
M16.0
1 1
(P)
1117.0
1 1
08.4
Symbol information: 18.5 BAY1 18.6 BAY2 18.1 T_Bayl 18.2 T_Bay2 Q4.3 L_AUTO 18.0 LB M16.0 M_Aux_LB M_Conv_Fault M17.0 L_Bay-LB Q8.4 M_Auto_RIGHT M16.4
-----------
Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Momentary contact Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 2 Indicator light Automatic mode Light barrier Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT
Network 4: Control the Conveyor Motor to the right M16.2
1 1
Q8.5 01
M16.4
Symbol information: M_Jog_RIGHT M16.2 M_Auto_RIGHT M16.4 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
-- Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT -- Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT
Page 18
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault Conditions (FC17) FC17 : Title:
atellat
: Conveyor fault (time monitoring) 117
Q4.3
08.5
I I
I
S_0 DT
S
0 BI
SST#6S — TV
R
BCD
Symbol information: L_AUTO Q4_3 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5 OD_Conv_Monitoring T17
-- Indicator light Automatic mode -- Run conveyor RIGHT -- Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode
Network 2: display Conveyor fault H17. 0 T17
M10.3 —______i
SR
-
I I
QS.0
11.0—
Symbol information: 117 OD_Conv_Monitoring M17.0 M_Conv_Fault I1.0 T_Ackn_Fault M_Flash_2Hz M10.3 Q5.0 LConv_Fault
------
Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode Memory bit Conveyor fault Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Conveyor fault
Network 3: count Conveyor faults C17 M17.0
I1------- CD
S_CD
04.3 — S
CV—...
Cf 3 — PV CV BCD ... —
Symbol information: M17.0 M_Conv_Fault C17 C_Conv_Fault Q4.3 L_AUTO
-- Memory bit Conveyor fault -- Counter Conveyor faults -- Indicator light Automatic mode
•
1111:
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 19
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Lock-out in FC15 FC15 : Mode Section Network 1: Indicator Light System On/Off
I0.0
II
M15.1
04.1 SR
I0.1
I/I Symbol information: I0.0 T_System_ON
M15.1 I0.1 Q4.1
-----
M_Aux_System_ON T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM
Momentary contact System ON Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact) Indicator light System ON
Network 2: Indicator Light MAN Mode
I0.5
II
M15.2
04.2 10.4
SR S
(P)
Q
Q4.1
I/I 10.4
Symbol information: IO.S T_M/A_Accept
M1S.2 10.4 Q4.1 04.2
M_Aux_Man_ON S_M/A_ModeSelect L_SYSTEM L_MAN
------
Momentary contact, confirm operating mode Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: .0'=MANUAL, Indicator light System ON Indicator light MAN mode
Network 3j: Indicator Light AUTO Mode
Q4.3 10.5
H15.3
10.4
1
(P)
1 1-S
C17 1I -
SR 0-
M15.7
(N)--
Q4.1
IA
10.4 VI
Symbol information:
10.5 M15.3 10.4 C17 M15.7 Q4.1 Q4.3
SITRAIN Training for
T_M/A_Accept M_Aux_Auto_ON S_M/A_ModeSelect C_Conv_Fault M_Aux_C17 L_SYSTEM L_AUTO
Automation and Industrial Solutions
--------
Momentary contact, confirm operating mode Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, .1'=AUTO Counter Conveyor faults Edge auxiliary memory bit Counter-Conveyor faults Indicator light System ON Indicator light Automatic mode
Page 20
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch10, Add.-Ex6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor Jogging (FC16) FC16 : Title: Network 1: Jog to the right Q4.2
10.2
10.3
IA
M16.2
T16
0-1
IA
T1S S_OFFDT 0— SST#25— TV
BI BCD
Symbol information: L_MAN 04.2 T_Jog_RIGHT 10_2 T_Jog_LEFT 10.3 M16.2 M_Jog_RIGHT
-----
Indicator light MAN mode Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT
Network 2: Jog to the left 04.2
10.2
10.3
Q8.6
T15
T16 S_OFFDT Q
S5T#2S — TV
-
BI BCD
Symbol information: 04.2 L_MAN 10.2 T_Jog_RIGHT 10.3 T_Jog_LEFT 08.6 K_Conv_LEFT
-----
Indicator light MAN mode Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact Run conveyor LEFT
ti
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 21
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC 15) FC15 : Mode Section 1
4fetmork
4: Indicator
Light System On/Off Q4.1
M30.0
SR
M30.1— R
Symbol information: M30.0 M_System_ON_HMI M15.1 M_Aux_System_ON Q4.1 L_SYSTEM M30.1 M_SystemOFFHMI
-----
Memory bit System ON (TP170) Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON Indicator light System ON Memory bit System OFF (TP170)
Network 2: Indicator Light MAN Mode
M30.5
I I
M15.2 (p)
Q4.2 M30.4
SR
1/
Q-
Q4.1 IA
M30.4
Symbol information: M30.5 M_M/A_Accept_HMI M15.2 M_Aux_Man_ON M30.4 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI Q4_1 L_SYSTEM Q4.2 L_MAN
------
Memory bit, confirm operating mode (TP170) Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: .0..MANUAL Indicator light System ON Indicator light MAN mode
Network 3: Indicator Light AUTO Mode 04.3 M30.5
I1
M15.3
M30.4
SR
Q-
(p)
04.1 N30.4
SyMbol information: M_M/A_Accept_HMI M30.5 M_Aux_Auto_ON M15.3 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI M30.4 L_SYSTEM Q4.1 L_AUTO Q4.3
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
------
Memory bit, confirm operating mode (TP170) Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL Indicator light System ON Indicator light Automatic mode
Page 22
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC 16) FC16 : Title: Network 1: Jog to the right Q4.2
M30.2
Symbol information: L_MAN 04.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI M30.3 M_Jog_RIGHT M16.2
M16.2
M30.3
-----
Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (TP170) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (TP170) Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT
Network 2: Jog to the left 04.2 I I
1130.2
I/I
Symbol information: L_MAN Q4.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI M30.3 Q8.6 K_Conv_LEFT
Q8.6
M30.3
II
-----
Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (TP170) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (TP170) Run conveyor LEFT
NW 3 and NW 4 are not modyfied
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 23
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC 17) FC17 : Title:
n
etwork 1: Conveyor fault (time monitoring)
Q4.3
T17 S_ODT
Q8.5 S
0
S5T#6S — TV
BI BCD — . .
Symbol information: Q4.3 L_AUTO Q8.5 H_Conv_RIGHT T17 OD_Conv_Monitoring
-- Indicator light Automatic mode -- Run conveyor RIGHT -- Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode
Network 2: Title:
T17 I
M17.0 SR
M10.3 0
I
05.0 01
11.0 I I
M31.0 I I
Symbol information: T17 OD_Conv_Monitoring I1.0 T_Ackn_Fault M31.0 M_Ackn_Fault_HMI M17.0 M_Conv_Fault M10.3 M_Flash_ZHz Q5.0 L_Conv_Fault
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (TP170) Memory bit Conveyor fault Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Conveyor fault
Page 24
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
-
Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC 19) FC19 : Count parts Network 4: reset the counter to 0
Q4.1
MOVE EN
ENO
0 — IN
OUT
IA 18.4
Q8.4
MW20
Symbol information: - - Indicator light System ON - - Indicator light Light barrier bay - - Momentary contact Light barrier bay - - Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
L_SYSTEM L_Bay-LB T_Bay-LB MILACT
Q4.1 Q8.4 18.4 MW20
Network 2: count the parts in AUTO mode
18.0
04.3
M19.0
AUDI EN
(P)
ENO OUT —111120
MW20— IN1
1— IN2 Symbol information: - - Light barrier -- Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier - - Indicator light Automatic mode - - Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
LB M_Aux_Count L_AUTO MW ACT
18.0 M19.0 Q4.3 MW20
Network 3: Indicator Light ACTUAL=SETPOINT
CMP)=1
Q4.3
08.4 ()1
NW20— IN1 NW22— INZ
Symbol information: MW20 MW22 Q4.3
MILACT MW_SETP L_AUTO LBay-LB
Q8.4
Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp - - Indicator light Automatic mode - - Indicator light Light barrier bay
Network 4: Display the actual no. of parts
LBCD EN MW20 — IN
ENO OUT —QW6
Symbol information: MY20 MILACT QW_Dignsp
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
- - Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts - - BCD digital display
Page 25
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch13, Ex5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel (FC 42) FC42 : Control MM420 Motor ON M40.0
I
MOVE
1------ EN
1416:47F—IN
ENO OUT —QW42
Symbol information: M40_0 M_ME420_0n_HMI QW42 QWControlMM420
-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (TP170) -- Control word for MM420
Network 2 : Motor OFF M40.0
MOVE
EN W#16#47E — IN
ENO OUT —QW42
Symbol information: M_MM420_0n_HMI QWControlMM420
M40.0 QW42
-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (TP170) -- Control word for MM420
Network 3: Jog Right M40.2
M40.3
M40.0 EN
IA
MOVE ENO
11#16#57E- IN
OUT —QW42
Symbol information: M40.2 M_MM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M40.3 M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI M40.0 M_MM420_0n_HKI QW42 QW_Control_MM420
Memory bit MM420 Memory bit MM420 Switch On Memory Control word for
Jog RIGHT (TP170) Jog LEFT (TP170) bit MM420 (TP170) MM420
Network 4: Jog Left M40.3
M40.2
I/1
M40.0
MOVE EN
OUT —QW42
W#16#67E — IN
Symbol information: M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI M40.3 M_MR420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M40.2 M_MM420_0n_HMI M40.0 QWControlMM420 QW42
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
ENO
-----
Page 26
Memory bit MM420 Memory bit MM420 Switch On Memory Control word for
Jog LEFT (TP170) Jog RIGHT (TP170) bit MM420 (TP170) MM420
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
SIEMENS
Ch15: Closing Exercise: Overview Hardware Commissioning: Error
Correction in the given HW Config
What doesn't fit in the given HW Config?
1
CPU type and I/O module types
...replace with CPU actually used
2
PROFIBUS addresses of ET200 and MM420
." set accordingly to the actually used ET200 and MM420
3
ET200: Module types and I/O addresses
...set to I/O address 8 according to the given S7 program
Software Startup Error
Malfunction
Correction
Error Location
1
System (Q4.1) can not be switched on
OB 1, Network 1
CALL
2
Jog Cony. Right doesn't work
FC 16. Network 1
= Q 8.5
M.
3
Cony. doesn't transport the parts through the LB
FC 16, Network 3
FN 18.0
11111. FP 18.0
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Date. File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_16E.27
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 27
FC 15
insert
= M 16.2
_11 SITRAIN Training for gir
Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Commissioning (0B1) OBI : "Main Program Sweep {Cycle)" Network 1: Mode section
insert CALL FC15
Network 2: Control the Conveyor Motor
EN
FC16 ENO
Symbol information: FC16; FCCorfollot or
-
FC Control of conveyor motor
Network 3: Indicator Lights + Horn
FC14 EN ENO
Symbol information: FC14 FC_Signal
FC Indicator lights + Horn
Network 4 : Count parts
FC19 EN ENO
Symbol information: FC_Count_Add
FC19
-- FC Count parts using addition
Network 5: Conveyor monitoring
FC17 EN ENO
Network 6: Control 121420
FC42 EN ENO
Symbol information:
FC42
SITRAIN
FC 241420
Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
-
Page 28
FC Control 11/1420
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC14) FC14 : Indicator lights + Horn Network 1: Indicator Light bay 1 Q4.3
08.5
18.5
18.6
M17.0
Q8.4
II
I/I
I/I
I/I
I/I
lid
Q4.3
Ie.s
18.6
H10.5
M17.0
Q8.4
II
II
VI
II
I/I
I/I
Q4.3
Q8.5
M10.3
Q 8.1 -
0
1
1 I Symbol information: L_AUTO 04.3 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5 BAY1 18.5 BAY2 18.6 M_Conv_Fault M17.0 L_Bay -LB Q8.4 M_Flash_lHz M10.5 M_Flash_2Hz M10.3 L_Bayl Q8.1
----------
Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 1
Network 2: Indicator Light bay 2 04.3
Q8.5
18.5
18.6
M17.0
Q8.4
Q4.3
18.5
18.6
H10.5
M17.0
Q8.4
04.3
Q8.5
H10.3
II
II
Symbol information: L_AUTO Q4.3 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5 18.5 BAY1 18.6 BAY2 M17.0 M_Conv_Fault Q8.4 L_Bay-LB M10.5 M_Flash_lHz M10.3 M_Flash_2Hz Q8.2 L_Bay2
I/I
I/I
II
III
----------
I/I
08.2
I/1
Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 2
Network 3: Horn Q8.5
II
04.2
1110.3
1 1
Q8.7 () 1
Q8.6
Symbol information: 08.5 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.6 K_Conv_LEFT Q4.2 L_MAN M10.3 M_Flash_2Hz Q8.7 Horn
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
------
Run conveyor RIGHT Run conveyor LEFT Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Horn
Page 29
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC15) FC15 : Mode Section Network 1: Indicator Light System On/Off
M30.0
Q4.1 M15.1
SR
R
Symbol information: M30.0 M_System_ON_HMI M15.1 M_Aux_System_ON Q4.1 L_SYSTEM M30.1 M_SystemOFFHMI
-----
Memory bit System ON (HMI) Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON Indicator light System ON Memory bit System OFF (HMI)
Network 2: Indicator Light MAN Mode
M30.5
II
M15.2 (P)
M30.4
Q4.2 SR
1/1— S
Q4.1
I/1
QL
M30.4
Symbol information: M30.5 M_M/A_Accept_HMI M1S.2 M_Aux_Man_ON M30.4 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI Q4.1 L_SYSTEM Q4.2 L_MAN
------
Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI) Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'..4LU Indicator light System ON Indicator light MAN mode
Network 3: Indicator Light AUTO Mode Q4.3 M30.5
M15.3
M30.4
SR 0
—
Q4.1
I/1
M30.4
I/I
Symbol information: M_M/A_Accept_HMI M30.5 M_Aux_Auto_ON M15.3 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI M30_4 L_SYSTEM Q4.1 L_AUTO Q4_3
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
------
Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI) Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'.=MA/ Indicator light System ON Indicator light Automatic mode
Page 30
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC16)
FC16 : Title:
Q8.5 -> M 16.2
Network 1: Jog conveyor motor to the Right Q4.2
M30.2
M30.3
T16 If TIS S_OFFDT 0—
BI
SST#2S — TV
BCD —...
Symbol information: L_MAN 04.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI M30.3 KConvRIGHT Q8.5
-----
Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI) Run conveyor RIGHT
Network 2: Jog conveyor motor to the Left Q4.2 1
M30.2
M30.3
/1
Q8.6
TiS
IA
} 1
T16 S_OFFDT
Q — SST#28— TV R
Symbol information: 04.2 L_MAN M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.3 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI 08.6 K_ConvLEFT
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
-----
Page 31
BI BCD
Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI) Run conveyor LEFT
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC16)
Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor motor in AUTO mode
18.5
18.1
M16.4 SR
I I 18.6
18.2
04.3
1/1
18.0
II
M16.0
M17.0
II
->
08.4 I
Symbol information: 18.5 BAY1 18.1 T_Bayl 18.6 BAY2 18.2 T_Bay2 Q4.3 L_AUTO 18.0 LB M16.0 M_Aux_LB M17.0 M_Conv_Fault Q8.4 L_Bay-LB M16.4 MAuto_RIGHT
-----------
Proximity sensor Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Momentary contact Bay 2 Indicator light Automatic mode Light barrier Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT
Network 4: Control the conveyor motor to the Right H16.2
II
Q8.5
N16.4
SyMbol information: M_Jog_RIGHT M16.2 M_Auto_RIGHT M16.4 K_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
-- Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT -- Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT
Page 32
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC17)
FC17 : Title: : Conveyor fault (time monitoring)
etuark
Q8.5
Q4.3
I
II
------ S
T17 S_ODT
1
S5T#6S —
TV
S
Q M31.0 —
BI
M17.0 SR
Q
M10.3 1
------
Q5.0
It
BCD
Symbol information: L_AUTO Q4.3 H_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5 OD_Conv_Monitoring T17 M_Conv_Fault M17.0 M_Ackn_Fault_HMI M31.0 M_Flash_2Hz M10.3 L_Conv_Fault Q5.0
--------
Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode Memory bit Conveyor fault Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (HMI) Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Conveyor fault
Network 2: Count Conveyor faults
M17.0 I I------ CD Q4.3 — S C#3
C17 S_CD CV —...
PV CV BCD
Symbol information: M17.0 M_Conv_Fault C17 C_Conv_Fault Q4.3 L_AUTO
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
-- Memory bit Conveyor fault -- Counter Conveyor faults -- Indicator light Automatic mode
Page 33
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC19) FC19 : Count parts Network 1: reset the counter to 0 Q4.1
I/I
MOVE ENO
EN
08.4
0- IN
18.4
OUT —MWZO
I I
Symbol information: Q4.1 L_SYSTEM Q8.4 L_Bay-LB 18.4 T_Bay-LB MW20 MW_ACT
Indicator light System ON Indicator light Light barrier bay Momentary contact Light barrier bay Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported
Network 2: count the parts in AUTO mode 18.0
M19.0
Q4.3
(P)
I I------ EN
AD DI ENO
MATZO- IN1
OUT —111120
INZ
Symbol information: 18.0 LB M19.0 M_Aux_Count Q4.3 L_AUTO MI620 MW ACT
-----
Light barrier Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Indicator light Automatic mode Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported
-----
Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to Indicator light Automatic mode Indicator light Light barrier bay
Network 3: Indicator Light ACTUAL=SETPOINT CMP>=I
04.3 ------
I I
08.4 C)
131120— IN1 MWZZ-,INZ
Symbol information: MW_ACT MW20 MW_SETP MW22 L_AUTO Q4.3 LBay-LB Q8.4 Network 4: Display the actual no. of parts
EN
LIMO ENO
TIWZO- IN
OUT —0116
Symbol information: MW_ACT MW20 QW_DigDisp QW6
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
-- Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported -- BCD digital display
Page 34
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC42) FC42 : Title: Network 1: Motor ON
M40.0 I I------ EN
MOVE ENO OUT —QW42
W#16#47F — IN
Symbol information: M_MM420_0n_HMI M40.0 QWControlMM420 QW42
-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI) -- Control word for MM420
Network 2: Motor OFF M40.0 1/1
MOVE — EN ENO OUT —QW42
W#16#47E- IN
Symbol information: M_MM420_0n_HMI M40.0 QWControlMM420 QW42
-- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI) -- Control word for MM420
Network 3: Jog to the Right
M40.2
M40.3
M40.0 EN
MOVE ENO
W#16#57E- IN OUT —Q11142
Symbol information:
M_MM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI M_HM420_0n_HMI QW_Control_HM420
M40.2 M40.3 M40.0 QW42
-----
Memory bit MM420 Memory bit MM420 Switch On Memory Control word for
Jog RIGHT (HMI) Jog LEFT (HMI) bit MM420 (HMI) HM420
Network 4: Jog to the Left
M40.3
II
M40.2
I/I
M40.0 EN
MOVE ENO
W#16#67E- IN
OUT •
Symbol information:
M40.3 M40.2 M40.0 QW42
M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI M_HM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M_MM420_0n_HMI QWControlHM420
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 35
Memory bit MM420 Memory bit MM420 Switch On Memory Control word for
Jog LEFT (HMI) Jog RIGHT (HMI) bit MM420 (HMI) MM420
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Expansions (FC14)
All bay indicator lights show the same behavior: -> query all bay proximity
FC14 : Indicator lights + Horn
switches
Network 1: Indicator Light bay 1 Q4.3
Q8.5
18.5
1 1 04.3 Q4.3
18.6 1/1
18.5
18.6
18.7
18.7
M17.0
Q8.4
Q8.1
... : M10.5
II
01
M17.0
Q8_4
I/I
ICI
1671.......... Af675 ..............
1
Symbol information: Q4.3 L_AUTO Q8.5 R_Conv_RIGHT 18.5 BAY1 18.6 BAY2 18_7 BAY3 M17.0 M_Conv_Fault Q8_4 L_Bay-LB M10.5 M_Flash_lHz M10.3 M_Flash_2Hz Q8.1 L_Bayl
Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Proximity sensor Bay 3 Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 1
Network 2: Indicator Light bay 2 04.3
II
Q4.3 1 1 04.3
08.5 I/I
18.5
I/I
I8.5 --
: VI
18.6
M17.0
IA
08.4
Q8.3 01
/1
18.6
18.7
M10.5
1 1
I/I
1
M17.0
08.4
'dirt ...... Wiry ................
II
II
Symbol information: Q4.3 L_AUTO R_Conv_RIGHT Q8.5 BAY1 18.5 BAY2 18.6 BAY3 18.7 M_Conv_Fault M17.0 L_Bay-LB Q8.4 M_Flash_lHz M10.5 M_Flash_2Hz M10.3 L_Bay3 Q8.3
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Indicator light Automatic mode Run conveyor RIGHT Proximity sensor Bay 1 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Proximity sensor Bay 3 Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 3
Page 36
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Expansions (FC14) new NW for indicator light Bay 3 Network 3: Indicator Light bay 3 04.3
Q8.5
04.3
18.5
18.6 •
/I 08.5
18.7
M17.0
08.4
18.7
18.7
M10.5
M17.0
I/I
s
Q4.3
18.6
I/I I/I
II
II
Q8.3
Q8.4
I/I
ICI
2110.3
I I
All bay indicator lights show the same behavior: -> query all bay proximity
Symbol information: Q4.3 08.5 18.5 18.6 18.7 M17.0 Q8.4 M10.5 M10.3 Q8.3
L_AUTO K_Conv_RIGHT BAY1 BAY2 BAYS M_Conv_Fault L_Bay-LB M_Flash_lHz M_Flash_2Hz L_Bay3
Indicator Run convey Proximity Proximity Th.„ T Proximity se Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Indicator light Bay 3
___ switches
Network 4: Horn Q8.5
04.2
II
II
1110.3
08.7
08.6
I I Symbol information: 08.5 Q8.6 Q4.2 M10.3 Q8.7
K_Conv_RIGHT KConv_LEFT L_MAN M_Flash_2Hz Horn
------
Run conveyor RIGHT Run conveyor LEFT Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz Horn
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 37
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Expansions (FC16) FC16 : Title: Network 1: Jog conveyor motor to the Right Q4.2
M30.2
M30.3
I I
I I
III
T16
I8.0 .•. M16.2 •• ........
T15 S OFFDT
Q —
Jog RIGHT only up to LB
S5TO2S- TV
BCD —...
R
Symbol information: Q4.2 L_MAN M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.3 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI 18_0 LB M16.2 M_Jog_RIGHT
Network
------
BI
Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI) Light barrier Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT
2j: Jog conveyor motor to the Left
04.2 I I
•.........• H30.2
III
H30.3
-I I
T15
III
18.5
•
I/I
•
Q8.6
........ •
116 S_OFFDT 0
Jog LEFT only up to Bay1
S5T/12S- TV
BI BCD
Symbol information: Q4.2 L_MAN M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI M30.3 BAY1 18.5 K_Conv_LEFT 08.6
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
------
Indicator light MAN mode Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI) Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI) Proximity sensor Bay 1 Run conveyor LEFT
Page 38
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Expansions (FC16) Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor motor in AUTO mode
18.7
18.6
18.5
.... ti..... M16.4 Is.1 ; SR
1-H-S 18.7
18.5
18.6
18.2
18.6
18.5
18.7
18.3 •
I/I
•
Q4.3
1/
18.0
M16.0
I
(p)
Conveyor Start possible from all bays
M17.0
1
1
08.4
Symbol information: BAY3 18_7 BAY2 18_6 BAY1 18.5 T_Bayl 18.1 T_Bay2 18.2 T_Bay3 18.3 L_AUTO Q4_3 LB 18.0 M_Aux_LB M16.0 M_Conv_Fault M17.0 L_Bay-LB Q8_4 M_Auto_RIGHT M16.4
-------------
Proximity sensor Bay 3 Proximity sensor Bay 2 Proximity sensor Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 1 Momentary contact Bay 2 Momentary contact Bay 3 Indicator light Automatic mode Light barrier Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier Memory bit Conveyor fault Indicator light Light barrier bay Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT
Network 4: Control the conveyor motor to the Right M16.2
-I 1
08.5
C)-1
M16.4
Symbol information: M16.2 M_Jog_RIGHT M16.4 M_Auto_RIGHT Q8.5 KConvRIGHT
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
-- Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT -- Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT
Page 39
ST-SERV1 Exercise Solutions
SIEMENS
Training and Support
SIEMENS
1011111001
• 11•11•0111•0110•1 7/110,01
• Mr...V. c■ Ome•Hia•
•••••••••■
• •••••■■ ••■■•
.1••••• ■••••■••
lirmemelgessen•weneare
.••■•.• ••■■•••■• •■•■
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. AS rights reserved.
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.1
SITRAIN Training for Rtr
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page
Contents Do You Still have Questions about our Learning Offers? www.siemens.com/sitrain or sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld
..........2 ..........3
SIMATIC S7 Courses on Totally Integrated Automation
4
SIMATIC S7 Courses on Totally Integrated Automation
5
Do You Need Service & Support ? Know-How in the Service & Support Portal
6 7
Communication in the Service & Support Portal ... just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 1/2
8 9
... just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 2/2
........10
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 1
ST-SERV1 Training and Support
SIEMENS
Do You Still have Questions about our Learning Offers?
We'll help you! ... With the Infoline: Tel 01805 23 56 11 Fax 01805 23 56 12 he Intern t: siemens
/sitrain
4 SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Date: File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_178.2
Page 2
SITRAIN Training for %■T
Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Training and Support
SIEMENS www.siemens.com/sitrain or sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld LI fi7 G° Acrotess http://streineutomatron.semax.cornistrernworkdi Lairs
re
SIEMENS SITRAINTM - Training Courses by Siemens for Automation and Industrial Solutions Getting directly applicable know-how fast practical tralning courses from the manufacturer!
•
In over 200 locations in 62 countries, Strain oilers tramp courses for Siemens Industry products and the interplay of the products 0 systems. Thts worldwide presence makes t possible tot vailo build up know-how on site—wherever you wish your training curse. In addrtron to traditional classroom trainng courses, you can acquire your krrwlevige wth the help of rrinovalive and communications media such as Learning with Web Based,' Tiering.
> New Training front SITRARI'.?
Training Topics Worldwide You ere looking for a Paring °arse on a specific product and would like to know where n the world this course is offered, Here you wil Ind an overview of the worldwide tree wog courses on offer. > Arnomation Systems
> Low Voltage Controls and DiSll ibution
> Communication Ilet works
> More Ti Miring Courses by Siemens
> throes Technology
> Process Automation
0 Electrical Installation Technology
> Sensor s. Test and Measurement
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.3
Gal In Contact > SITRAIW. worldmap > SITRA111`. contacts worldwide I SITRAIN'. Worlehencie
z.1 CI
1 _1 1SITRAIN Training for NIT.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
The complete course selections are accessible through the following links: www.siemens.de/sitrain or www.siemens.com/sitrain Course Search
With Course Search it is possible, through various search filters, such as, keyword, target group etc., to find your desired course selections. The filters can also be combined.
Top Links
With Top Links, various course selections can be accessed directly, such as, SIMATIC S7, SINUMERIK solution line ...
Training News
Here, new SITRAIN course selections and actions are presented at a glance.
Course Catalog
The Course Catalog enables you to find the desired course through learning paths or through the structure of the Siemens Mall.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 3
ST-SERV1 Training and Support
SIEMENS SIMATIC S7 Courses on Totally Integrated Automation Service personnel, Operators, Users, Maintenance personnel
Programmers, Commissioning engineers, Project engineers
W8 2)
wATZ
PLC's for Beginners (WBT)
PLC's for Beginners (WBT)
Micromaster 420 (WBT)
PROFIBUS (WBT)
SIMATIC S7 TIA Service Training 1
SIMATIC S7 TIA Programming 1
Decision makers, Sales personnel, Project managers, Project members, Programmers, Commissioning engineers, Project engineers, Service personnel, Maintenance personnel
SIMATIC TIA for Non-Technicians wAT4
WinCC flexible (WBT)
WinCC flexible (WBT)
PROFIBUS (WBT)
MICROMASTER 420 (WBT)
SIMATIC S7 TIA Service Training 2
SIMATIC S7 TIA Programming 2
WRIO)
Industrial Ethernet (WBT) WinCC flexible (WBT)
Industrial Ethernet (WBT)
Siemens Certified Service Technician Level 1
SIMATIC S7 Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
wRT2)
WinCC flexible (WBT) SIMATIC S7 TIA Programming 3
SIMATIC S7 TIA Service Training 3
Exam for Siemens certified Service Technician Level 2
Production Automation with TIA
Learning path ST 2
Date: File:
Exam for Siemens Certified Programmer
18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.4
Page 4
ST 4
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1 Training and Support
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Courses on Totally Integrated Automation
Mtcroma star 420 t WI3TY:3
Decision makers, Sales personnel, Project managers, Project members, Programmers, Commissioning engineers, Project engineers, Service personnel, Maintenance personnel
Programmers, Commissioning engineers, Project engineers
Service personnel, Operators, Users, Maintenance personnel
4 SIMATIC 57 TIA Programming 1
SIMATIC 57 TIA Service Training 1
it
tfdlik,
Non Technicians
wIrrn MICRoMASTER 420 (WEl" SIMATIC S7 TIA Programming 2
mat ethernet Siemens Certified Service Technician Level 1
Produ lion Automation with TIA
*'
.inCC flexible IWET)
ra
SIMATIC S7 TIA Programming 3
TIC 57 IA Service Training 3
Exam for Siemens Certified Service Technician Level 2
Learning path ST 2
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Exam for Siemens Certified Programmer
18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.5
ST 4
1111
,r;
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Sitrain Certified Program
SITRAIN Training for
•
The SITRAIN Certification Program is the new international certification program from SITRAIN
•
The SITRAIN Certification Program consists of different modules in which you can participate
•
After passing the examination of a module, the participant receives an international diploma and certificate
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 5
ST-SERV1 Training and Support
SIEMENS
Adrenal
Do You Need Service & Support ? Li El endow, w I two ' fp sow Di
IC Ittpollsupport.eutoination.samens.can/WW/Isap.dtMuncacslissosinfoautadwoseus SIEMENS International
Intranet
siemans.com -s Automation and Drives
E q3anoll
Contact I Semen
I. tigri 1 Register
[Advanced]
I Product Support I Applications & 1 oohs Services !Firm glaring I For um
Automation and Drives Service & Support
Supp Subwribe to our newsletter now 4 Release for delaery, SIMOTION C240 7 Pon, T-Tap PRO Cornedor Released fa Deivery SalesfDekvery Release Basic Versions of the Model IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7 V5.20 SP4 APPlicatun sample Mir degnosis end set up of ETXOS FC via Too:Peened TPI 708
Se artti
world wide support
I Cheese a rout nrySupport -s re,
led-help Ertee your specific ;sabot Int median Wow to Welty extract the IMP related entries from ea globel dateesse
as
-0 to personal:cabal
go to our globe Menne we webs** enact specr
FAGS, menial& downbede and approvelskertil cations 4 Product Support
Protect Nese or Pan Wenner
For automaton system nteraction end connectally Wenn.. old Woe to nantaban examples, samples. demonstration systems and more'
Search Teed (hay wads)
4 Application & Tools
Support by experts worldwide
l
le= Ones Help
View eesong careeredions and talk to other users sboal
specific scaliest applications and issues. Please note the you we reed to Login to actively partcpate
A Now start your discussion math other users
Send your question drectir to a Siemens !anneal ni
t
en Weal Toe
expert Ws our aerie Support Request
-8
Support Request
Our service offer
SWAMI •
Our Service products are designed to meet yap support needs to Its Mire We cycle or your nelallatat 4 Spare parts and repairs Service on-see 4 Optimization and modernization
4 Technical consulting 4 Configuring and Software engineering 4 Technical Support
SIMATIC S7
Date:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
File:
18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.6
HM0111011 CM Vs entomb:in LMT cad
User wee kennel
W
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Under www.siemens.com/automation/service&support the Service & Support portal offers online access to the wide range of information and services regarding the Automation & Drives portfolio whenever required. Online support is divided into two principle topics: Know-How
Communication
•
Product support: Technical information and downloads for products (manuals, FAQs, software updates, etc.)
•
Applications & Tools: Automation solutions (solution examples, system descriptions, demo versions, calculators, tools etc.)
•
Services: Information on wide range of services offered by Service & Support (contacts, repairs etc.)
•
Forum: Direct customer - customer communications in case of technical questions
•
Support Request: Technical requests are answered by experts
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 6
ST-SERV1 Training and Support
SIEMENS
Adnue
Know-How in the Service & Support Portal Wectaaln to I Unks ml
htti 1 survort seutornabon
1,-.4111L4i.z,
.cornIww *tic drf unc
SIEMENS
sinntfins.com Itslianta
)Automation and Drives
International
Snap ty
a.cs.f
paooll rf.:Z
Intranet Contact i nfamy
I Product Support I Applications & Tools I Services Information I Forum
Automation and Drives
Service • Support
!ogint Register [Afwara-mf]
Delivery IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7 V524 SP/
S FC vie Touchpenel TP17013
Product Support
Services & Infos
Techn. information and downloads for products
btormalion below to quid*
s trom our global database
to Our glabal dobbin. and explore the FACts, mammas, dovenloads and approvals 4 Product Support
Prock.rct None or Part
or sttornabon system internam and c cbcii below 10, erbecatIon examPle7 . 7.7007.
Search Text (key words)
aeon systems and more -1J■nnhr.
prodixt
View exestrog carwersations end let
aorsceccs and
Tnni
4 field Semite 4 Sweepers
Applications & Tools
Support by experts world,
specific
Information on range of services offered
Information on automation solutions
you we need to Login to actively pa
A Now start your discussion and
er users
Our service offer
SIEMENS 4
One Service products are dessgned to meet your support needs la the elite lie cycle or Your ttStalabbnTechnical consulting
-t Spare parts and repairs
-a Configuring and Software engineering
- Service on-site -a Optimization and modernization
SIMATIC S7
• Technical Support
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.7
Wormetion maw Automation Value Card
Warfel
w User stew
SITRAIN Training for kV Automation and Industrial Solutions
General
The online support with its comprehensive information system and many types of services is available around the clock. From product support over service information to interactive services, online support is always your first step you need to take for obtaining a quick solution.
Product Support
Profound expertise in our products and systems and up-to-date information are the Product Support's support know-how basis in form of FAQs, downloads of, for example, updates / upgrades, up-to-date product information from Marketing & Sales, manuals in electronic form in PDF format, test certificates and characteristics
Applications & Tools Applications & Tools is the new platform for solutions and system overviews in the Service & Support portal. Applications & Tools help you solve your automation tasks. This support is provided in the form of programming examples and tools, background knowledge, functional descriptions, recommendations on possible actions, performance data etc. The focus is not on the individual product but rather on the individual products working together. Services
Here you can find our complete range of services and detailed information on our Service & Support processes and a database containing the contact persons.
Information
Are you looking for the latest Service & Support brochures - or do you want to know at which trade show you can meet us personally? All of this and much more can be found under "Information".
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 7
ST-SERV1 Training and Support
SIEMENS
Communication in the Service & Support Portal SIEMENS International Automation and Drives
Home
4 siemens.com
I ntranet
Automation and Drives
Genteel I Stamp
I Product Support I Applications & Tools I Services I Information I Forum
Service & Support
Loon I RecKler bscrIbe to our
4
Release for delivery, SIMOTION C240 7/Er Power T-Tap PRO Connector Released for Delivery Sales/Delivery Release, Basic Versions of the Model IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7 4 Application sample for diagnosis and set up of ET2005 FC via Touchpanel TP170B 4
Choose a country
4
Self-help Search Product Support Documents melon below to quickly om our global database.
Technical Forum
Discussion platform for Browse Support Docu customers Go to our global database FAQs, manuals, clownloa, and appro s ce ic Ions -0 Product Support
Online requests to the A&D
Contact
For automation system interaction and connectivity questions, click below for application examples, samples, demonstration systems and more
hotline
Go
Spare parts
4 Application & Tools
Help
Support by experts worldwide lechnical Forum
Onins risc
the Siemens expert
View existing conversations and talc to other users about specific product applications and Issues Please note that you will need to Login to actively participate. es Now start your discussion with other users
Send your question directly to a Siemens technical support expert via our online Support Request
SIEMENS
IIIPMEMILIMPLIMIPPAPPARIk
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Guided Tour
4121 Support Request
Our service offer
SIMATIC S7
Contacts worldwide -0 Field Service
18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.8
%Or
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
Technical Forum
In addition to the comprehensive scope of services, we support the direct dialog among experts with the help of modern web technology. The new Technical Forum is an attractive discussion platform (English and German) where users and experts can exchange information.
Support Request
With the online Support Request you will always find direct answers to your questions. In the online screens you can describe your requests. Through the knowledge base you will immediately be informed about possible solutions. If the suggested solution does not resolve your problem, you can send the web form directly to your team of experts in Technical Support (Hotline).
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 8
ST-SERV1 Training and Support
SIEMENS
..• just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 1/2 SIEMENS International Automation and Drives
I ntranet
4, siemens.com
Home Product Support Applications & Tools
Contact I Siternap
Deutsch I Francais] Itahanoi EsparlelI °PIZ
->Automation and Drives
I Services I Information I Forum
Service & Support
Login I Register
-4Subscribe to our newsletter now.
A clearly structured, user-friendly navigation in a "Product tree" or an Index Automation and Drives
Automation and Drives
Service & Support
Service & Support
Product tree
Product tree
Index (A-Z)
•
Index (A-Z)
ABCDEFGHI J
Product Information
_ L ft
Drive Technology
HOP ORSTUVW X Y
Automation systems
Search in the Index Go
9 J Communication/Networls
database and explore the product s downloads and approvelskertificat rduct Support
An intelligent, comprehensive Search function
s,,,-,terri inter action and connectivity below for application examples, sermls-_____ yrterri, and more
alication & Tools
9
Lov.Voltage Controls
9
Electrical Installation Technology
•
Process automation
Poorer supplies
-
n Spare parts
Help f-=2 Online Help
Notes:
9 J Sensor technology, measuring and t •
SIMATIC PCS 7 V5.2 0 SP4 -ral el TP1708
The Index is the fast access to our Product Support.
ion directly to a Siemens technical support
Guided Tour
Support Request port Request
9 _j Safety systems - Safety Integrated Select a letter from the above overview of make use of our Index search.
9 J Industries 9J Service
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.9
SITRAIN Training for Automation and Industrial Solutions
To find the required information, you can use the intelligent Search function and a the user-friendly navigation: Search
An intelligent and comprehensive search function provides you with the relevant results. • Automatic recognition of key words • Automatic spell-check • Automatic sorting of the hitlist based on topicality
Navigation
SITRAIN Training for
You can also do a targeted search in the product tree to obtain the required information. Use the index for easy selection of the product.
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 9
ST-SERV1 Training and Support
SIEMENS
... just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 2/2 SIEMENS International Automation and Drives
Horne 1 Product Support
-) siernens.corn
Automation and Drives Applications & Tools I Services
Deutsch' Franca1A Itall no/ Espanol -
I
htforrnation
I
Intranet Carted! StaMag
Forum
Service & Support
Loge; I Register
(Advanced)
Search
Functions: Forum: Experts exchange in forum contributions Newsletter: Always up-to-date thanks to daily news on pre-selected topics Support Request Jechnischeoeien
myTree: Define your personal, transparent product tree
'llachaairee
Personal data is automatically filled in forms, e.g. in the Support Request
SIMATIC S7
Date: File:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Registration
IMutterrnann Imintermennall•enline.de • Finto Testcompieve Aare* "Musterstrasse 3
I
18.09.2009 SERV1_17E.10
L2
INN trimidw Mon Login
vans 'Michael 'Telefon 1.49 123 45678 Abtellung 'Quaid& 'PLZ 'Sue 73 1 4- 1Musterstildt
2.1 SITRAIN
Training for gr Automation and Industrial Solutions
After registering with our service "mySupport", you can utilize our complete range of online services after entering your data only once. You will then have exclusive access to the following functions:
Your personal newsletter Through the Automation and Drives Newsletter system you receive daily, upto-date news on selected topics - sent direct to your mailbox. As a mySupport user, you can individually adjust the mailing options. myTree
Your personal product tree. As a mySupport user, you can adjust the product tree so that it only shows those products and services from the comprehensive A&D range that are important to you. Thus you can always maintain an overview and find the required information faster.
Online Support Request You need to enter your personal data only once and they will be automatically entered in the Support Request forms. You don't have to repeatedly enter the same information in every form which saves you time for more important things. myForum
SITRAIN Training for
Direct access to our Technical Forum. As mySupport user you also automatically have direct access to our Technical Forum
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page 10
ST-SERV1 Training and Support
Siemens AG Industry Sector Gleiwitzer Str. 555 90475, NURNBERG DEUTSCHLAND
www.siemens.corn/automation
View more...
Comments
